JP4663660B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention includes a variable display device that includes a display unit that displays a background image while variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified in a predetermined arrangement, and the identification information as a display result of variable display When the combination of the display results in the specific display result, the player shifts to a specific game state advantageous to the player, and when the combination of the identification information becomes the special display result as the display result of the variable display, the variable of the identification information in the variable display device The present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs a special effect during display.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, which is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device. Some are configured to be controllable to a specific gaming state.

  The specific game state means a state advantageous for a player who is given a predetermined game value. Specifically, the specific gaming state is, for example, a state in which a special variable winning device is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a ball (a big hit gaming state), or a state in which a right to become advantageous for a player has occurred. In this state, a predetermined game value such as a state where conditions for paying out premium game media are easily established is given.

  In such a gaming machine, the fact that the display result of the variable display device that displays the symbol as identification information is a combination of specific display modes (specific display result) determined in advance is generally referred to as “big hit”. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Further, when a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the V zone provided in the big prize opening) is not established at the time when the big prize opening is closed, the big hit gaming state is ended.

  In addition, if a special condition such as a display result of variable display of identification information becomes a special specific display result (special display result) of the specific display results in the variable display device, the jackpot is subsequently obtained. Some are configured to shift to a high-probability state (also referred to as a probability variation state) in which the probability of occurrence of the occurrence is high.

  In the following Patent Document 1, if the result of the big hit determination is out of place, after determining the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol (left and right symbols), different tables are obtained depending on whether or not reach is reached. A gaming machine is disclosed that uses a difference value for a specific symbol (the number of deviations relative to a first stop symbol or a second stop symbol) to determine a final stop symbol by adding the difference value to the second stop symbol. Yes.

  In the following Patent Document 1, if the result of the big hit determination is out of place, after determining the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol (left and right symbols), different tables are obtained depending on whether or not reach is reached. A gaming machine is disclosed that uses a difference value for a specific symbol (the number of deviations relative to a first stop symbol or a second stop symbol) to determine a final stop symbol by adding the difference value to the second stop symbol. Yes.

  Further, Patent Document 2 below discloses a gaming machine that displays a background symbol in a direction opposite to the direction in which the special symbol fluctuates.

JP 2003-164613 (paragraphs 0048-0057, FIGS. 8-10)

Japanese Patent No. 3714197 (paragraphs 0042-0047, FIGS. 8-10)

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the main control means (corresponding to a game control microcomputer) is configured to determine all stop symbols, the control burden on the main control means increases. End up. Further, Patent Document 2 does not clearly disclose a process for determining a stop symbol.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of simplifying the identification information determination process while reducing the control burden of the gaming control microcomputer.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, left, middle, and right decorative symbols) that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed in a predetermined arrangement (for example, up and down directions) and a background image is displayed. A variable display device (for example, the variable display device 9) having a display unit (for example, a left / middle / right display region, an upper / middle / lower display region), and a combination of identification information in the variable display device. A plurality of lines that can be derived and displayed are set in advance (for example, five lines of upper, middle, lower, right-down, and right-up are set), and combinations of specific identification information among combinations of identification information as variable display results specific display result (e.g. big hit symbol) is shifted to an advantageous specific gaming state (e.g. jackpot gaming state) a for the player when deriving displayed in the line, the combination of the identification information The combination of the special identification information (e.g., Chance th A, Chance th B, chances eyes for突確(sudden probability variation pattern), Chance th for Koatari (Koatari symbol)) as a temporary lead or show results in the line When the derived display is performed, a special effect is performed on the variable display device (for example, when the chances A and B are reached, the super-reach is developed, and when the chances for a sudden chance are reached, two rounds of sudden probability change big hits. A game machine that executes an effect in the chance mode after executing the game, and executes an effect in the chance mode after executing the two rounds of the small hit game when the chance for a small hit is found (for example, a pachinko game) a machine 1), the identification information of the plurality of types, each different specific information is assigned, the variable display of the variable display of the identification information to identify the order in the sequence The turn derives and displays the reach identification information that constitutes a part of the identification information that constitutes the combination of specific identification information, and the combination of identification information other than the final identification information that is derived and displayed last is derived and displayed. A game control micro that controls the progress of the game , including a variable display pattern in which the final identification information is variably displayed and in a reach state, and a special combination of identification information is a combination of identification information that does not include reach identification information. computer (e.g., a game control microcomputer 560) and, effect control microcomputer for controlling the display state of the variable display device (e.g., presentation control microcomputer 100) and includes a microcomputer for game control, specific Whether it is a display result (for example, whether it is a big hit) and special identification information Predetermining means (for example, steps S57, S58, and so on in the game control microcomputer 560) for determining whether or not to make a combination and a variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern) of variable display of identification information before derivation display of the display result. A part for executing S201 to S212) and a predetermined command transmitting means (for example, a game control micro) for transmitting a predetermined command (for example, a variation pattern command, a symbol information designation command) capable of specifying the determination result of the predetermined means. A design command control process (step S28) in the computer 560 for executing a control for transmitting a variation pattern command and a symbol information designation command), and the production control microcomputer is based on a predetermined command. Display unit in variable display device Identification information determination means for determining a combination of identification information deriving displayed as a combination or display a result of the identification information temporarily derived displayed from among a plurality of types (e.g., executing step S621, S626, S632 in effect control microcomputer 100 And when the variable display time (for example, the variable time) that can be specified from the variable display pattern has elapsed, the display unit starts variable display of identification information in a predetermined direction based on the reception of the predetermined command. A portion that executes steps S800 and S802 to S804 in variable display control means for deriving and displaying a combination of identification information determined by the identification information determination means (for example, effect control process in the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S777)) ; Especially variable decorative pattern Display control means for displaying the background image in a direction opposite to the direction of variable display of the identification information (for example, the effect control process in the effect control microcomputer 100 (step) S777), which executes steps S800, S802 to S804; particularly, a part related to background image variation display control), and the identification information determination means includes a combination of special identification information based on a predetermined command. (For example, N in step S659, N in S674, N in S677, N in S682, Y in S1023, Y in S1026, Y in S1040, Y in S1051, Y in S1112, Y in S1117) , S1139 Y, S1144 Y), a combination of identification information is special identification information Determining the combination of (e.g., effect control microcomputer 100 executes the steps S663, S679, S680B, S684, S1025, S1028, S1042, S1053, S1114, S1119, S1141, S1146), based on pre-determined command When it is specified that the reach state is not obtained and the specific display result is not obtained (for example, Y in step S651, Y in S653), the reach identification information (for example, the reach symbol) is determined, and the specific information attached to the final identification information The difference between the specific information attached to the reach identification information (for example, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol) is selected using a first difference selection table (for example, a symbol selection table during normal deviation or a symbol selection table during super development) then, the selected final identified by differential Determining the distribution (e.g., run the microcomputer 100 for the effect control the reach chromatic loss determination process in step S655), based on pre-determined command, the combination of and not a reach state specific display results and special identification information when identified that do not (for example, N of Y, S653 in step S651), not the combination of the combination a special identification information of identification information, and so that not a combination of the identification information including a reach identification information The combination of identification information is determined using the reach non-reach table (for example, the middle symbol selection table) set in (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the reach-less loss determination process in step S654) , and is variable. The display pattern is derived after the reach identification information is derived and displayed on a predetermined line. A variable display pattern for deriving and displaying the final identification information constituting the specific display result by executing a specific effect (for example, a relief effect) after provisional derivation display of the temporary final identification information that does not constitute the fixed display result, and the identification information When the determining means specifies the variable display pattern for executing the specific effect based on the pre-determined command (for example, Y in step S1032), the determining means adds the specific information attached to the temporary final identification information and the reach identification information. A difference from the specific information is selected using a second difference selection table (normal middle symbol temporary stop selection table shown in FIG. 77), and temporary final identification information is determined based on the selected difference (for example, effect control) Microcomputer 100 executes step S1048B), and the difference between the specific information attached to the provisional final identification information and the specific information attached to the reach identification information Is selected (for example, Y in step S1032), when the difference between the specific information attached to the final identification information and the specific information attached to the reach identification information is selected when the specific effect is not executed (for example, step S1012). Control data (for example, judgment value) is allocated so that the difference between the specific information attached to the provisional final identification information and the specific information attached to the reach identification information is smaller at a higher rate than Y). A difference is selected using the second difference selection table (for example, a normal middle symbol in which a larger number of determination values are allocated to a smaller symbol difference than the normal symbol selection table used in step S1015) A middle symbol is determined using a temporary stop selection table (FIG. 77)) .

In the claims 1 invention described, the identification information determining means, based on the pre-determined command, when specifying that a combination of special identification information, determines a combination of the identification information on the combination of the special identification information When it is specified that the reach state is not obtained and the specific display result is not obtained based on the predetermined command, the reach identification information is determined, and the specific information attached to the final identification information and the specific information attached to the reach identification information Is selected using the first difference selection table, final identification information is determined based on the selected difference, and a specific display result and special identification information are not obtained based on a predetermined command. combined with and when identifying that there is no, not a combination of the identification information is a combination of special identification information, and the reach identity free Which is configured to determine a combination of the identification information by using the set reach no time table so as not to the combination of the identification information, while reducing the control load of the game control microcomputer, presentation control micro The identification information determination process in the computer can be simplified. In addition, when the identification information determining means specifies the variable display pattern for executing the specific effect based on the predetermined command, the specific information attached to the temporary final identification information and the specific information attached to the reach identification information Are selected using the second difference selection table, provisional final identification information is determined based on the selected difference, and the specific information attached to the temporary final identification information and the specific information attached to the reach identification information When the difference between the specific information attached to the final identification information and the specific information attached to the reach identification information is selected when the specific effect is not executed, the provisional final identification is performed at a higher rate. The difference is selected using the second difference selection table to which the control data is allocated so that the difference between the specific information attached to the information and the specific information attached to the reach identification information becomes small. Because it is made, since the proportion of a particular display result specific effect is executed to derive the display becomes higher when the difference is smaller, it is possible to increase the player's interest for the final identification information.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front. In the following embodiments, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can be applied to other gaming machines such as a slot machine.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (excluding a game board described later). Is a structure including

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Below the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the game balls. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  Near the center of the game area 7 variably displayed and displayed a plurality of types of decorative patterns for presentation that can be identified based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, the hitting of the hit ball at the start winning opening 14). A variable display device 9 for deriving and displaying the result is arranged. In this embodiment, the variable display device 9 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and the decorative symbols are arranged in the vertical direction (in this embodiment, in the left, middle and right display regions (decorative symbol display areas)). , From top to bottom) is variably displayed. That is, the decorative design is configured to scroll vertically. In the display areas of the left, middle, and right columns, three consecutive frames of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed when variable display of decorative symbols is stopped (see FIG. 3 and the like).

  Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result is to stop and display the symbol (excluding temporary stop before execution of the so-called re-lottery effect and temporary stop before execution of the relief effect).

  In this embodiment, as the decorative symbols displayed in the three display areas of the variable display device 9, as shown in FIG. 2, a number symbol “1” to “8” and a blank between the number symbols are used. The symbol “*” shown is used. During variable display (fluctuation) of decorative symbols, as a rule, the left display area displays "8", "*", "7" ... "*" decorative symbols in numerical order, and the middle and right display areas , “1”, “*”, “2”... “*” Are displayed in numerical order. Note that the decorative symbol displayed in the left display area is called “left symbol”, the decorative symbol displayed in the middle display region is called “middle symbol”, and the decorative symbol displayed in the right display region is “ It is sometimes called “right design”.

  A special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8 that variably displays a special symbol as identification information is provided on the variable display device 9. In this embodiment, the special symbol display 8 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers “0” to “9”, for example. The special symbol display 8 may be configured to variably display more types of numbers such as “0” to “99” in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp a specific stop symbol.

  The variable display device 9 performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (production) during the variable symbol display period of the special symbol by the special symbol indicator 8. The variable display device 9 that performs variable display of decorative symbols is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. The special symbol display 8 that performs variable display of the special symbols is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board.

  At the bottom of the variable display device 9, a special symbol hold memory display comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the start winning opening 14, that is, the number of hold memories (also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). 18 is provided. Every time there is an effective start prize, the display color of one display is changed. Each time the variable display on the special symbol display 8 is started, the display color of one display is restored. In this example, since the special symbol display 8 and the special symbol hold memory display 18 are provided separately, the number of hold memories can be displayed even during variable display. In the display area of the variable display device 9, a special symbol reserved storage display area including four display areas for displaying the number of reserved memories may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved memories is 4, but the upper limit value may be a larger value. Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

  Below the variable display device 9, there is provided a start winning opening 14 through which a game ball can be won. The game ball won in the start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the start opening switch 14a. The start winning opening 14 is provided with a variable winning ball device 15 that performs an opening / closing operation. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16 (not shown in FIG. 1). When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, it becomes easy for the game ball to win the start winning opening 14 (easy to start winning), which is advantageous to the player.

  A special variable winning device that is opened by the solenoid 21 in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is provided below the start winning opening 14. The special variable winning device includes an opening / closing plate 20 and forms a big winning opening. The game ball that has entered the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided directly above the variable display device 9. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When a game ball wins the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the left and right lamps (a symbol can be visually recognized when the lamp is lit). For example, if the left lamp is lit when the variable display ends, it is a hit. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 changes from a disadvantageous state to a player's advantageous state when the normal symbol is a winning symbol. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing to the gate 32, the normal symbol hold memory display 41 increments the LED to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  The game board 6 is provided with a plurality of winning holes 29, 30, 33, 39, and winning of game balls to the winning holes 29, 30, 33, 39 is performed by winning hole switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a, respectively. Detected. Each winning opening 29, 30, 33, 39 constitutes a winning area provided in the game board 6 as an area for accepting game balls and allowing winning. The start winning opening 14 and the big winning opening also constitute a winning area that accepts game balls and allows winning. A decorative lamp 25 blinkingly displayed during the game is provided around the left and right of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in at the bottom. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c are provided. Further, a decoration LED is installed around each structure (such as a big prize opening) in the game area 7. The top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the decorative LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the gaming machine.

  Also, below the left speaker 27 is provided a prize ball LED 51 that is lit while paying out the prize ball, and below the right speaker 27 is provided a ball cut LED 52 that is lit when the supply ball is cut. Yes. Further, a prepaid card unit that enables lending of a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown). In addition, a status indicator for notifying the player of a gaming state (a normal gaming state, a probability change state, and a short time state, which will be described later) inside the gaming machine is a predetermined location on the game board 6 (for example, next to a big prize opening). (Not shown).

  In the gaming machine, a ball hitting device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the game area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. If the game ball enters the start winning opening 14 and is detected by the start opening switch 14a, the special symbol display device is in a state in which the variable symbol special display can be started (for example, the end of the big hit game or the end of the previous variable display). 8, variable display (variation) of the special symbol is started, and variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the variable display device 9. If the variable symbol special display cannot be started, the reserved memory number for the special symbol storage memory display 18 is increased by one.

  The variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and the decorative symbol of the variable display device 9 stops when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the stop symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a probable variation symbol (excluding a sudden probability variation symbol described later) or a non-probability variation symbol of the big hit symbol, it shifts to a big hit gaming state (probable big hit or non-probable big hit (also called normal big hit)). . That is, the special variable prize-winning device is opened until a certain time (for example, 29.5 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the big prize opening. It should be noted that one round in the big hit gaming state is a period from when the special variable winning device is opened until a predetermined period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, ten) of hitting balls wins the big winning opening. In this embodiment, when the stop symbol is changed to the jackpot gaming state based on the probability variation symbol (excluding a sudden probability variation symbol described later) or the non-probability variation symbol, the jackpot gaming state is continued for 15 rounds. The

  In addition, when the stop symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a special probability variation symbol (hereinafter referred to as a sudden probability variation symbol), a special jackpot gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “suddenly sudden”) that makes the player recognize that the gaming state has suddenly shifted to the certain probability variation state. It is called probable big hit.) In the case of sudden probability big hit, the special variable winning device is opened twice for a short period (for example, 5 seconds). In the sudden probability change big hit, it is one round from when the special variable winning device is opened until it is closed, and the gaming state of the sudden probability change big hit is continued for two rounds. It should be noted that, in the sudden odds big win, the period during which the special variable prize winning device is opened is short, and ten game balls do not win while the special variable prize winning device is open. Therefore, until ten game balls win the big prize opening. Need not be defined as one round. When a sudden odd jackpot occurs, unlike in the case of 15 round jackpots, the effects of each round do not proceed in sequence on the variable display device 9, but the game state suddenly shifts to the probable state. A special performance is performed to show the person.

  Further, when the stop symbol at the time of the stop becomes a small hit symbol, the game shifts to a small hit game state in which the game value given to the player is smaller than the big hit game state. That is, it shifts to a gaming state in which the special variable winning device is opened twice only for a short period (for example, 5 seconds). In this way, in the small hit game state, the same game value as the game value given to the player when a sudden probability change big hit occurs is given. However, unlike the case of sudden probability change big hit, the gaming state is not shifted to the probability changing state after the small hit gaming state ends. From this, the player expects the occurrence of a probable big hit suddenly rather than the small hit. Even when a small hit occurs, a special effect similar to that at the time of sudden big odd hit is executed. Such a special effect is called a two-round effect. As for the effects for two rounds, there are two special effects, one that is executed when a sudden odd-change big hit occurs, and the other is a combination of sudden and small hits that is executed when either a sudden big change or small hit occurs suddenly. is there.

  In addition, the opening period of the special variable winning device (big winning opening) at the time of sudden probability big hit and small hit is set to 5 seconds, for example, but it is not limited to such a period, and it is a shorter period such as 0.5 seconds. May be.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the variable display device 9 are synchronized. Here, the synchronization means that the variable display period (variable display time) is the same. In addition, the display result on the special symbol display 8 (a special symbol stop symbol) corresponds to the display result on the variable display device 9 (decorative symbol stop symbol). The correspondence between the two symbols will be described later.

  Next, the type of gaming state and the transition of gaming state will be described.

  The probability variation state (probability variation state) refers to a gaming state that is advantageous to a player who has a higher probability of making a big hit (that is, the symbol is a big hit symbol) than the normal gaming state and the short-time state. In this embodiment, the term “probability change state” does not include a short time state of probability change described later unless explicitly stated.

  The time-short state (time shortening state) is a gaming state in which the variable symbol display time (variation time) of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and the decorative symbol on the variable display device 9 is shorter than the normal gaming state and the probability variation state. I mean. By shortening the variable display time in this way, the variable display of symbols is frequently executed, and the probability of jackpot per unit time is improved, resulting in an advantageous state for the player. In the short time state, in the normal symbol display 10, the probability that the stop symbol becomes a winning symbol is higher than that in the normal gaming state and the probability variation state, and one of the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball device 15 or Both are higher than the normal gaming state and the probability variation state, and become a more advantageous state for the player. In the short time state, the variable symbol display time (variation time) of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is shorter than that of the normal game state and the probability change state. In this embodiment, the term “short-time state” does not include a short-term state of probability change described later unless explicitly stated.

  The probability change short state means a game state that is a probability change state and a time short state. The probabilistic short time state is a very advantageous state for the player.

  In this embodiment, the gaming state transitions as follows.

(1) When the normal game state and the short-time state, the probability change symbol (excluding the sudden probability variation symbol) will be a big hit, and when the big hit game ends, the gaming state is changed from the normal game state and the short-time state to the probability change time-short state . As a result, the probability that the special symbol and the normal symbol stop symbol become a winning symbol is increased, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased.

(2) When the probability variation state and the probability variation time short state, the probability variation symbol (excluding sudden probability variation symbol) will be a big hit, and when the big hit game ends, if the game state is the probability variation state, it will shift to the probability variation time short state, When the gaming state is the short state at the time of probability change, the short state at the time of probability change is maintained without changing. Thereby, the probability that the special symbol and the normal symbol stop symbol become a winning symbol is increased, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased.

(3) When the normal game state and the short-time state suddenly become a big hit with a probable change symbol, and when the big hit game ends, the gaming state is shifted from the normal game state and the short-time state to a positive change state. At this time, the probability that the stop symbol of the special symbol becomes a winning symbol is increased, but the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol is not increased, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is not shortened, and a variable prize is awarded. The opening time and the number of times of opening in the ball device 15 cannot be increased. It should be noted that after the sudden change game is suddenly ended, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be changed to the certainty state. In the short-time state, when the big hit game suddenly becomes a big hit with the odd change game and the big hit game ends, the gaming state is not changed from the short-time state to the positive-change state, but the gaming state is changed from the short-time state to the short-term probability change time state. You may make it make it. In this case, the time-short state does not end with the end of sudden probability change big hit, but suddenly sudden change big hit has occurred, or small hit (if a small hit occurs in short-time state, as will be described later) It is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the short-time state has continued.

(4) When the probability change state and the probability change time short state suddenly a big hit with a probability change symbol, and when the big hit game ends, if the game state is the probability change state, the probability change state continues without changing, and the game state changes When it is in the short-time state, the state is shifted to the probability variation state. At this time, the probability that the stop symbol of the special symbol becomes a winning symbol is increased, but the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol is not increased, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is not shortened, and a variable prize is awarded. The opening time and the number of times of opening in the ball device 15 cannot be increased. In addition, after the sudden probability big hit game is ended, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be changed to the probability variation state. Note that when the probability change time short state suddenly becomes a big hit with a probability change symbol and the big hit game ends, the game state is not shifted from the probability change time short state to the probability change state, but the probability change time short state is continued without changing. You may do it. In this case, the short-time state of the probability variation short-time state does not end with the sudden end of the probability variation big hit, either suddenly sudden change has occurred suddenly or small hit (small hit occurs when the probability change short state is short) In this case, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the probability change time short state is continued as will be described later.

(5) A big hit is made with a non-probable variation in the normal game state and the short-time state, and when the big-hit game is ended, the short-time state is controlled by a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) after the big hit. That is, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the transition from the normal gaming state to the short-time state is made a predetermined number of times of variation, and when the gaming state is the short-time state, the short-time state is continued for a predetermined number of times of variation. At this time, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. Then, when the change of the predetermined number of changes is completed, the gaming state is shifted from the short-time state to the normal gaming state.

(6) When the probability change state and the probability change time short state, a big hit is made with a non-probability variation symbol, and when the big hit game is ended, the time is controlled to a short time state by a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) after the big hit ends. In other words, the state is shifted from the probability variation state and the probability variation short time state to the short time state by a predetermined number of fluctuations. At this time, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. Then, when the change of the predetermined number of changes is completed, the gaming state is shifted from the short-time state to the normal gaming state.

(7) In the normal gaming state and the probability changing state, the small hit symbol is a small hit, and when the small hitting game ends, the normal gaming state and the probability changing state are continued without changing. In addition, after the end of the small hit game, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be shifted to the certain change state.

(8) When the time-short state and the probability change time short state, the small hit symbol is a small hit, and when the small hit game ends, the time-short state and the probability change time short state are continued without change. In addition, after the end of the small hit game, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be shifted to the certain change state.

  The transition of the gaming state as described above is an example, and the present invention is not limited to such a configuration.

  Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an arrangement pattern of reach symbols. As shown in FIG. 3, the variable display device 9 is divided into left, middle and right display areas. In the display area of each column, three consecutive frames of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Therefore, the decorative display of 3 rows × 3 columns (= 9 symbols) is stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9 and is visually recognized by the player.

  In the variable display device 9, the left, middle and right decorative symbols are variably displayed, and the combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols (except for the symbol “*”) derived and displayed thereafter is displayed on the active line. When you have the same design, you win a big hit. In this embodiment, five lines of “upper stage”, “middle stage”, “lower stage”, “lower right” and “upward right” are provided as effective lines.

  In this embodiment, reach is established when the left symbol and the right symbol (excluding the symbol “*”) are aligned on the same effective line. For example, as shown in FIG. 3, when the left symbol and the right symbol are aligned with the same symbol “1” in the upper line (“1UH”), the left symbol and the right symbol are the same symbol “1” in the lower line. When aligned (“1LH”), when the left symbol and right symbol are aligned with the same symbol “1” in the middle line (“1CH”), when the left symbol and right symbol are double lines (lower right and up right) When the same symbols “1” and “8” are arranged (“1WH”), reach is established. In “1WH”, “1” is a reach aligned with a line rising to the right, and “8” is a reach aligned with a line descending to the right.

  The symbols (1UH, 1LH, etc.) attached to each reach symbol indicate the symbol number (“1”, “2”, “3”...), And the second digit indicates a line (“ “Upper stage”, “middle stage”, “lower stage”, “double line”), and the first digit “H” indicates a state of “Hazure”. In the second-digit line display, “U” is an abbreviation for “upper” Upper, “C” is an abbreviation for “middle” Center, “L” is an abbreviation for “lower” Lower, “W” indicates “double line”. For example, “7CH” means that the symbol is “7”, “middle line”, and “out”.

  In this embodiment, when reach is established, an effect different from normal is performed with a lamp or sound. The effect and the reach display mode in the variable display device 9 are called reach effects. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (decoration design etc.)) or a background display mode (for example, color) of the variable display device 9 is displayed. May be changed.

  Next, the correspondence relationship between the stop symbol of the special symbol and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (the outlier symbol of both symbols, the probability variation symbol, the non-probability variation symbol, the sudden probability variation symbol, and the small hit symbol symbol) will be described.

(1) Special design stop design:
As described above, the special symbols variably displayed on the special symbol display 8 are “0” to “9”. Among these, “0” to “3”, “8”, “9” are outliers, “7” is a probability variable symbol, “6” is a non-probability variable symbol, and “5” is a sudden probability variable symbol. “4” is a small hit symbol. Although a plurality of types of special symbols (“0” to “3”, “8”, “9”) are provided, only one type (for example, “−”) may be used. In this case, when the result of the big hit determination is “missing”, the process of selecting a special symbol outlier symbol becomes unnecessary, and the processing burden is reduced.

(2) Decorative design stop design:
As described above, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the symbols “1”, “*”, “2”, and “*”, respectively.

(2-1) A decorative pattern is a pattern in which the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns is not aligned on the same effective line on all active lines (for example, “358”, etc .: a sudden probability change described later) Excluding symbols and small hit symbols). In addition, although the left and right decorative symbols are aligned on the effective line in the same pattern (although it is a reach), the state in which only the decorative symbols in the middle are not aligned on the effective line is also an outlier.

(2-2) A big hit symbol of a decorative symbol is a symbol in a state in which a combination of left, middle and right decorative symbols is aligned on the same effective line on a predetermined effective line. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an arrangement pattern of jackpot symbols. As shown in FIG. 4, the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols (excluding the symbol “*”) is aligned with the same symbol on the active line. For example, as shown in FIG. 4, when a combination of left, middle and right decorative symbols is aligned with the same symbol “1” in the upper line (“1UF”), the left middle right decorative symbol combination is in the lower line. When the same symbol “1” is aligned (“1LF”), the combination of the left middle right decorative symbol is aligned with the same symbol “1” in the middle line (“1CF”), the left middle right decorative symbol When the combination is aligned with the same symbol “1” in the line with the lower right (“1SF”), when the combination of the left and right decorative symbols is aligned with the same symbol “1” with the line with the upper right (“1AF”) ), A big hit.

  The symbol (1UF, 1LF, etc.) attached to each jackpot symbol is the symbol number (“1” “2” “3”...) In the third digit, and the second digit is displayed in a line (“ “Upper stage”, “middle stage”, “lower stage”, “lower right”, “upward right”), and the first digit “F” indicates a “big hit” (Fever) state. In the second-digit line display, “U” is an abbreviation for “upper” Upper, “C” is an abbreviation for “middle” Center, “L” is an abbreviation for “lower” Lower, “S” is an acronym for “downward right” SAGARI, and “A” is an acronym for “upward right” AGARI. For example, “7AF” means that the symbol is “7”, “rising line to the right”, and “big hit”.

  Among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. 4, there is a symbol in a state in which the combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is aligned with a specific symbol (“1” “3” “5” “7” “8”) on the active line. It is a probable variation. Specifically, in FIG. 4, “1UF” “1LF” “1CF” “1SF” “1AF”, “3UF” “3LF” “3CF” “3SF” “3AF”, “5UF” “5LF” “5CF” The symbols “5SF”, “5AF”, “7UF”, “7LF”, “7CF”, “7SF”, “7AF”, “8UF”, “8LF”, “8CF”, “8SF”, and “8AF” are probabilistic symbols. In addition, among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. 4, the symbols in the state in which the combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols are arranged on the active line with symbols other than the specific symbols (“2”, “4”, “6”) are not. It is a probable variation. Specifically, in FIG. 4, “2UF” “2LF” “2CF” “2SF” “2AF”, “4UF” “4LF” “4CF” “4SF” “4AF”, “6UF” “6LF” “6CF” The symbols “6SF” and “6AF” are non-probable variations.

  In this embodiment, when the lottery effect after the big hit is performed, the stop symbol derived and displayed when the change is stopped does not correspond to the special symbol and the decorative symbol. For example, even if the stop symbol of the special symbol that is derived and displayed at the time of fluctuation stop is the probability variation symbol “7”, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that is derived and displayed at the time of fluctuation stop when executing the re-lottery effect after the big hit Becomes an uncertain variable “2UF” or the like. In this case, the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed as a stop symbol of the ornament symbol in the re-lottery effect after the big hit.

(2-3) In this embodiment, in order to notify the player that there is a high probability of being a big hit or a big hit, there is a decorative pattern in the middle left and right in the middle of the variation of the decorative design. An effect of temporarily stopping and displaying the special combination of is executed. Such a special combination of left, middle, and right decorative patterns is called a chance for production. In this embodiment, a chance eye A and a chance eye B are provided as chance eyes in the production.

  As shown in FIG. 5, 40 types of chances (“1C” to 40C ”) are provided as chances A. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, as the chance item B, 32 types of chance items (“41C” to “72C”) are provided. The symbol (C) attached to each chance is an abbreviation of “Chance”. When the chance item A shown in FIG. 5 is temporarily stopped and displayed, it changes again thereafter and develops into super reach. Further, when the chance item B shown in FIG. 6 is temporarily stopped and displayed, it changes again thereafter and develops into a super reach or a big hit without developing into a reach. Therefore, the player expects a big hit when the chance items A and B are displayed in a stopped state. The “special display result” includes the chance eyes A and B on the stage, and the “special stage” includes the chance points A and B on the stage being temporarily changed after the temporary stop display. Production (including super reach production) is included.

  When a missing symbol is determined, the determined missing symbol may accidentally become a chance eye A or a chance eye B. In this case, if the chance item A or the chance item B is derived and displayed, there is a risk of misunderstanding that the player develops into a super reach even though it does not develop into a super reach (high possibility of a big hit). . In order to avoid such misunderstandings, in this embodiment, control for prohibiting derivation and display of the same symbol as the chance eye A or chance eye B as a symbol is executed.

(2-4) Suddenly probabilistic symbols of decorative symbols are specific symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “8”) in which the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is different on the middle line. It is a symbol in a state stopped and displayed at. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, 10 kinds of symbols (designs surrounded by a thick frame: “73C” “78C” “113C” “118C” “123C” “128C” “ 133C "," 138C "," 143C "," 148C "). Specifically, “135” “571” “185” “318” “387” “578” “753” “783” “835” “873” is stopped and displayed suddenly on the middle line. It is a probable variation. In addition, the suddenly probable pattern is also called a chance chance for sudden use. Note that the “special display result” includes a chance item for sudden accuracy (sudden probability variation), and the “special effect” includes a sudden execution that is executed based on the fact that the chance item for suddenness is stopped and displayed. An effect during a promising big hit (effect for 2 rounds) and an effect during change after the transition to the chance mode (effect during the chance mode) are included.

  The sudden probability variation symbol is a kind of jackpot symbol, but it is desirable not to easily recognize the occurrence of the jackpot by the sudden probability variation symbol in order to make it appear that it has suddenly shifted to the probability variation state. For this reason, as described above, the suddenly probable symbols are different from the other jackpot symbols.

  When a missing symbol is determined, it may happen that the determined missing symbol suddenly suddenly becomes a probabilistic symbol. In this case, if the probability variation pattern is suddenly derived and displayed, the player may be misunderstood that the state has been shifted to the probability variation state without being shifted to the probability variation state. In order to avoid such misunderstandings, in this embodiment, a control is executed that prohibits suddenly derivation and display of the same symbol as the probability variation symbol as a symbol.

  FIG. 7 also shows symbols other than suddenly probable symbols (such as “74C” to “77C”; hereinafter referred to as “suddenly similar symbols”). These suddenly similar symbols have the same sequence (combination) of the sudden probability variation symbols and numbers, but are stopped and displayed on a line different from the line where the sudden probability variation symbols are stopped. That is, in the example of “135”, the suddenly probable symbols are stopped and displayed on the middle line, while the suddenly similar symbols are stopped and displayed on the upper and lower lines. Since such a symbol suddenly resembles a probable variation symbol, if it is derived and displayed as an outlier symbol, the player may misunderstand that the sudden probability variation symbol has been derived and displayed. For this reason, as in the case of the sudden probability variation symbol, a control is executed to prohibit the derivation and display of the sudden similarity symbol as a symbol.

(2-5) In the same manner as the suddenly probable symbols, the small hit symbols of the decorative symbols are also specific symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”) in which the combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is different on the middle line. "7" and "8"). However, the small hit design is different from the probability variation design and the arrangement (combination) of numbers. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, 10 types of symbols (designs surrounded by a thick frame: “83C” “88C” “153C” “158C” “163C” “168C” “ 173C "," 178C "," 183C "," 188C "). Specifically, the symbols in the state where “531”, “175”, “317”, “357”, “378”, “518”, “713”, “815”, “853” and “875” are stopped and displayed on the middle line are small. It is a winning symbol. A small hit symbol is also called a chance for a small hit. The “special display result” includes a chance item for a small hit (small hit symbol), and the “special effect” is executed based on the fact that the chance item for a small hit is stopped and displayed. The effect during the small hit (the effect for two rounds) and the effect during the transition after the transition to the chance mode (the effect during the chance mode) are included.

  In this way, since the small hit symbol of the decorative symbol is a symbol that resembles the suddenly probable symbol, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the sudden big odd hit or the small hit has occurred from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. become. In addition, as described above, since the same special performance (except for the performance only for sudden accuracy) is executed in the sudden odd change big hit state and the small hit state, the player suddenly has a probable big hit from the content of the production. It will not be possible to recognize whether it has occurred or a small hit has occurred. In addition, if the game is controlled to either the probability variation state or the normal game state after the sudden probability big hit or small hit, the variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is shortened in both the probability variation state and the normal game state. In addition, since the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are not improved and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is not shortened, the player cannot recognize to which state the gaming state has been changed. Therefore, the expectation for the transition to the probability change state by the player can be maintained after the sudden probability big hit or small hit ends. As for the special symbols, the sudden probability variation symbol is “5” and the small hit symbol is “4”, which are different symbols.

  When the missing symbol is determined, the determined missing symbol may accidentally become a small hit symbol. In this case, if the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that the probability change may have suddenly occurred (the player may have shifted to the probability change state). In order to avoid such a misunderstanding, in this embodiment, a control is executed to prohibit the same symbol as the small hit symbol from being derived and displayed as a symbol.

  FIG. 8 also shows symbols other than the small hit symbol (such as “84C” to “87C”; hereinafter referred to as “small hit similar symbol”). These small hit similar symbols have the same arrangement (combination) of the small hit symbols and numbers, but are stopped and displayed on a line different from the line on which the small hit symbols are stopped. That is, in the example of “531”, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line, but the small hit similar symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper and lower lines. Since such a symbol is similar to the small hit symbol, if it is derived and displayed as an outlier symbol, the player may misunderstand that the sudden probability variation symbol similar to the small hit symbol is derived and displayed. For this reason, as in the case of the small hit symbol, control for prohibiting derivation and display of the small hit similar symbol as a symbol is executed.

  FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration in the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 9 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A basic circuit (corresponding to game control means) 53 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The basic circuit 53 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, and a game control microcomputer 560 having a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program. And an I / O port unit 57. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to include at least the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Further, the I / O port unit 57 may be incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 also includes an I / O port unit.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, hereinafter, the game control microcomputer 560 executes (or performs processing) specifically. Is that the CPU 56 executes control according to the program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31. The game control means is realized by a basic circuit 53 including a game control microcomputer 560.

  Also, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a and 39a to the basic circuit 53 is mounted on the main board 31 and is specially variable. A solenoid circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the winning device (opening / closing plate 20) and the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 according to a command from the basic circuit 53 is also mounted on the main board 31, and is used for game control when the power is turned on. In accordance with data provided from a system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the microcomputer 560 and the basic circuit 53, an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state is sent to an external device such as a hall computer. Information output circuit 64 is also mounted on main board 31. It has been.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 performs display control of the special symbol display 8 that variably displays the special symbol, and also performs display control of the normal symbol display 10 that variably displays the normal symbol. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 controls the display state of the special symbol hold storage display 18 and also controls the display state of the normal symbol hold storage display 41.

  The hitting ball launching device that hits and launches the game ball launches the game ball toward the game area 7 as the launch motor 94 rotates. A power signal for driving the firing motor 94 is supplied to the firing motor 94 via the touch sensor substrate 90 from a power source mounted on a power supply board (not shown). A connection signal (VL signal) is input from the card unit 50 to the touch sensor substrate 90 via the interface substrate 66. Further, the touching of the operation knob (hitting ball handle) 5 by the player is detected by a touch sensor mounted on the touch sensor substrate 90. Then, the detection signal from the touch sensor and the signal from the power source are input to one AND circuit on the touch sensor substrate 90, and the output signal of the one AND circuit and the VL signal from the card unit 50 are the touch sensor substrate. 90 is input to another AND circuit, and a signal is output from the other AND circuit to the firing motor 94. Therefore, when the detection signal is not output from the touch sensor because the VL signal from the card unit 50 is not output to the touch sensor substrate 90 or the player does not touch the operation knob 5, the firing motor 94 Driving is stopped.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The display control of the variable display device 9 that receives and variably displays the decorative design is performed.

  FIG. 10 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 10, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 has an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 100 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and a strobe signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77. In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the variable display device 9 using the LCD based on the effect control command.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 allows the signal input from the relay board 77 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit is installed. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 10 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the input / output port 105. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the input / output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input / output driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. Further, it is supplied to a decorative lamp 25 provided on the frame side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input / output driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  The signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are transmitted bidirectionally between the effect control microcomputer 100, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 (a response signal is transmitted from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side). Communication).

  The effect control microcomputer 100 issues an image drawing instruction (development instruction) to the VDP 109 in accordance with the received effect control command. The VDP 109 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) based on an instruction from the effect control microcomputer 100 and develops the read data into a VRAM (not shown).

  The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP 109. The VDP 109 outputs image data in the VRAM (a frame buffer (also referred to as a drawing area or a development area) secured in the address space of the VRAM 84 shown in FIG. 11) to the variable display device 9. As a result, the image is displayed on the display screen of the variable display device 9.

  FIG. 11 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of a portion related to image display control in the effect control board 80. As described above, when the display control of the variable display device 9 (liquid crystal display device: LCD) is executed, the effect control CPU 101 gives a command according to the effect control command to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 is also referred to as GCL (Graphics Controller LSI). The VDP 109 reads out necessary data from the CGROM 83. The CGROM 83 stores image data such as symbols, frequently used characters, and backgrounds, and image data of characters that are not frequently used. The frequently used character stored in the CGROM 83 is, for example, an image made up of a person, an animal, a character, a figure, a symbol, or the like displayed on the variable display device 9. Note that the character includes a moving image (video) and a still image obtained by actual shooting.

  The VDP 109 generates image data to be displayed on the variable display device 9 according to the input data, and outputs R (red), G (green), B (blue) signals and a synchronization signal to the variable display device 9. The variable display device 9 performs, for example, screen display by a dot matrix method using a large number of pixels (pixels). In this embodiment, the R, G, and B signals are each represented by 8 bits. Therefore, according to the instruction from the VDP 109, the variable display device 9 can perform multi-color display of about 16.7 million colors with each of R, G, and B having 256 gradations. Note that the number of bits of the R, G, and B signals may be other than 8 bits, and the number of bits of the R, G, and B signals may be different from each other.

  The effect control board 80 includes various storage media such as a CGROM 83 and a VRAM (SDRAM) 84. The VRAM 84 stores data relating to a display image such as a frame buffer, character source data, palette data used for specifying or changing display colors, and the like. The source data is image data, and is expressed as source data in the sense of original image data.

  The VDP 109 stores various kinds of storage media such as a pallet data buffer 85 used for temporarily storing predetermined pallet data and a CG data buffer 86 used for temporarily storing predetermined CG data. In addition, the drawing control unit 91, a display signal control unit 87 for outputting a signal to the variable display device 9 based on the image data written in the frame buffer, and a DAC (digital analog converter) for converting the digital signal into an analog signal ) 88 and a moving image compression / decompression unit 89 that performs moving image compression processing and decompression processing. The drawing control unit 91 includes, for example, an attribute analysis unit, a VRAM address generation unit, a clipping unit, and a translucent luminance modulation unit. The attribute analysis unit analyzes parameters used when drawing the character. Information for designating an image drawing order, the number of colors, an enlargement / reduction ratio, a palette number, coordinates, and the like are set in the parameters. Note that the moving picture compression / decompression unit 89 may be configured to be controlled by the VDP 109 or may be configured to be controlled by the effect control CPU 101.

  Inside the VDP 109, a CG bus and a VRAM bus are provided. A CG bus interface (CG bus I / F) 93 is installed between the CGROM 83 and the CG bus. The CPU I / F 92 is also connected to the CG bus, and the effect control CPU 101 can access the portion connected to the CG bus via the CPU I / F 92. Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 can access the drawing control register 95 connected to the CG bus. The drawing control register 95 stores a command or the like from the rendering control CPU 101 for the drawing control unit 91. A VRAM I / F 94 is installed between the VRAM 84 and the VRAM bus. Note that the moving picture decompression unit 89 can access the VRAM 84 via the VRAM bus and can access the drawing control register 95 via the CG bus.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by game control means (game control microcomputer 560: CPU 56 and peripheral circuits such as ROM 54 and RAM 55) in the main board 31. When power is turned on to the gaming machine and the input level of the reset terminal becomes high level, the gaming control microcomputer 560 starts main processing after step S1. In the main process, the game control microcomputer 560 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). Then, the built-in device register is initialized (step S4). Further, after initialization (step S5) of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits), the RAM is set in an accessible state (step S6). The interrupt mode 2 is an address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the game control microcomputer 560 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device. Is a mode indicating an interrupt address.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the state of the output signal of a clear switch (not shown) input via the input port only once (step S7). When ON is detected in the confirmation, the game control microcomputer 560 executes normal initialization processing (steps S11 to S14).

  If the clear switch is not in the on state, whether or not data protection processing of the backup RAM area of the RAM 55 (for example, processing for stopping power supply such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (Step S8). If it is confirmed that such a protection process is not performed, the game control microcomputer 560 executes an initialization process. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process. In this example, if “55H” is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is a backup (ON state), and if a value other than “55H” is set, it means that there is no backup (OFF state).

  When it is confirmed that there is a backup, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S9). In step S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power outage or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the game control microcomputer 560 returns the game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Is performed (step S10). Then, the saved value of the PC (program counter) stored in the backup RAM area is set in the PC, and the address is restored.

  In the initialization process, the game control microcomputer 560 first performs a RAM clear process (step S11). In addition, a predetermined work area (for example, a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a special symbol process flag, a payout command storage pointer, a winning ball flag, a ball out flag, a payout stop flag, etc. A work area setting process for setting an initial value to a flag for selectively performing processing according to the state is performed (step S12). Further, a process of transmitting an initialization command for initializing the sub-boards (the payout control board 37 and the effect control board 80 in this embodiment) to each sub-board is executed (step S13). Examples of the initialization command include a command indicating an initial design of a decorative design displayed on the variable display device 9.

  Then, the CTC register provided in the game control microcomputer 560 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every 2 ms (step S14). That is, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S11 to S14) is completed, the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) are repeatedly executed in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. (Step S19). The display random number is a random number for determining a special symbol losing symbol displayed on the special symbol display 8 or a random number for determining a pattern variation pattern. The display random number update process is a display random number. This is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for use. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining an initial value of a count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a big hit determination random number generation counter). In a game control process described later, when the count value of the jackpot determination random number generation counter makes one round, an initial value is set in the counter.

  Note that when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt is prohibited. The display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are also executed in the timer interrupt process described later. This is to avoid competing with the processing in the timer interrupt processing. That is, a timer interrupt is generated during the processing of step S17 or step S18, and a counter value for generating a display random number during the timer interrupt processing or a counter count value for generating an initial value random number If updated, the continuity of the count value may be impaired. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt disabled state is set during the processing of step S17 and step S18.

  Next, the game control process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When the timer interrupt occurs during the execution of the main process, specifically, in the period when the interrupt is permitted during the execution of the loop process of steps S16 to S19, the game control microcomputer 560 displays FIG. The timer interruption process of steps S20 to S37 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not an on state has been entered) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off process, when it is detected that the power-off signal is output, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a power supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, and the state determination is performed (switch processing: Step S21).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 controls the display of the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, the special symbol hold memory indicator 18, the normal symbol hold memory indicator 41, and a status indicator (not shown). A display control process is performed (step S22). For the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, and the status indicator, control for outputting a drive signal to each indicator is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S34 to S36.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a big hit determination random number used for game control (determination random number update process: step) S23). The game control microcomputer 560 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: step S24, S25).

Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Decide whether or not to generate a big hit (and whether or not to generate a big hit) (for big hit determination)
(2) Random 2: Determine the type of jackpot (for determining the jackpot type)
(3) Random 3: Determine the special symbol's off symbol (for determining off symbol)
(4) Random 4: Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol (for variation pattern determination) (5) Random 5: Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for determination per normal symbol)
(6) Random 6: Determine the initial value of random 1 (for determining the random 1 initial value)
(7) Random 7: Determine the initial value of random 5 (for determining the random 5 initial value)

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 13, the game control microcomputer 560 uses (1) big hit determination random number, (2) big hit type determination random number, and (5) normal symbol determination determination. A counter for generating a random number is incremented (added by 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. In order to enhance the game effect, random numbers other than the random numbers (1) to (7) are also used.

  The jackpot determination random number (random 1) is a software random number that is updated by software, as with other random numbers, but is a random number circuit (for example, at a predetermined cycle provided separately from the game control microcomputer 560). It may be a hardware random number that is updated by hardware such as a circuit that updates a random number.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a special symbol process (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special variable winning device (large winning a prize port) in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 performs normal symbol process processing (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. By executing the normal symbol process, the display control of the normal symbol display 10 and the opening / closing control of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are executed.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a process of sending an effect control command or the like related to display control of the decorative symbols in the variable display device 9 (decorative symbol command control processing: step S28).

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a (step). S30). Specifically, the payout control mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on any of the start opening switch 14a, the count switch 23 and the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a being turned on. A payout control command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a test terminal process which is a process for generating and outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine (step S31). Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a drive command is issued to the solenoid circuit 59 (step S32: output process). The solenoid circuit 59 drives the solenoids 16 and 21 in accordance with a drive command in order to open the variable winning ball device 15 or the opening / closing plate 20 in the open state or the closed state.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the number of reserved storage (step S33).

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in accordance with the value of the special symbol process flag in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data. A control process is performed (step S34). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the game control microcomputer 560 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a special symbol variable display on the special symbol display 8 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data in accordance with the value of the normal symbol process flag. A control process is performed (step S35). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may change the display rate (“○” and “×”) every 0.2 seconds when the normal symbol fluctuation speed is 0.2 seconds. Further, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a normal symbol effect display on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a state display lamp display process for setting the state display control data for displaying the state display lamp in accordance with the game state in the output buffer for setting the state display control data (step). S36). The game control microcomputer 560 executes the display of the status indicator lamp by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S37), and the process ends.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of steps S21 to S36 in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  14 and 15 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. FIG. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the special symbol display 8 is executed.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 performs the special symbol process, if the start opening switch 14a for detecting that a game ball has won the start winning opening 14 provided in the game board 6 is turned on. That is, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the start winning opening 14 has occurred (step S311), it is confirmed whether or not the reserved memory number (start winning memory number) has reached the upper limit value (held memory number = 4). (Step S312).

  When the number of reserved memories has not reached the upper limit (N in step S312), the game control microcomputer 560 extracts software random numbers (such as a counter value for generating a big hit determination random number, etc.) Is stored in the storage area in the reserved storage buffer corresponding to the value of the reserved storage number counter as the extracted random number value (step S313). Extracting a random number means reading a count value from a counter for generating a random number and setting the read count value as a random value. In step S313, random 1 to random 4 are extracted from the above random numbers. In the reserved storage buffer, the same number of storage areas as the upper limit value of the reserved storage number are secured. Further, a counter for generating a jackpot determination random number and the like and a holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM. Even when the big hit determination random number is a hardware random number that is updated by the random number circuit, the big hit determination random number is extracted from the random number circuit at the timing when the start prize is generated, and the extracted random number value is stored in the pending storage number counter. The value is stored in the storage area in the pending storage buffer corresponding to the value.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 increments the value of the reserved memory counter indicating the number of reserved memories by 1 (step S314). Although not shown in FIG. 14, when the value of the pending storage number counter is incremented by 1, the start prize memory designation command (the start prize memory designation command at this time is the number of start prize memories due to the occurrence of the start prize). Is a command indicating that +1 has been added). Thereafter, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag).

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): When the microcomputer 560 for game control is in a state where variable symbol special display can be started, the number of numerical data stored in the reserved memory buffer (the number of reserved memories) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the hold storage counter. Then, if the count value of the holding storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit (whether or not the display result of the variable symbol special display is the specific display result). In the case of a big hit, the big hit flag is set, and the type of big hit (non-probable big hit, probable big hit, sudden probable big hit, etc.) is determined. If it is not a big hit, it is determined whether to make a small hit. In the case of a small hit, a small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S301.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): For determining a variation pattern that is extracted when a variation pattern of variable display of a special symbol (effect mode during symbol variation: variation time is also specified by the variation pattern) is generated at the time of start winning. Selection is made from among a plurality of types of variation patterns determined in advance according to the value of a random number (one of display random numbers). Further, based on the determined variation pattern, after setting the variable display time (variation time) until the special symbol is variably displayed and derived and displayed in the special symbol process timer, the special symbol process timer is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S302.

  Special symbol changing process (step S302): When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the special symbol process timer set in step S301 times out), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is changed. The value is updated according to step S303.

  Special symbol stop process (step S303): The variable symbol display on the special symbol indicator 8 is stopped and the stop symbol is displayed. In addition, an effect control command (decorative symbol stop designation command) for designating the stop of variable display of the decorative symbols on the variable display device 9 is transmitted to the effect control board 80. If the jackpot flag is set, the time from when the jackpot symbol is stopped until the jackpot game starts (the jackpot display time) is set in the jackpot control timer, and then the jackpot control timer is started. Let In addition, the effect control board 80 is provided with an effect control command (fanfare command) for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to execute a signal effect (fanfare effect) indicating that the jackpot game is started after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. Send. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S304. When the small hit flag is set, after setting the time from the stop display of the small hit symbol to the start of the small hit game (small hit display time) in the big prize control timer, Start the control timer. In addition, a special effect in the small hit game after the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed (2 round effect; the 2 round effect is an effect that is executed when a sudden sudden change big hit occurs (excluding the direct effect) The effect control command (fanfare command) for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to execute the effect) is transmitted to the effect control board 80. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S308. When the big hit flag and the small hit flag are not set, the internal state is updated to a value according to step S300.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S304): When the big hit display time has elapsed, control for opening the large winning opening is started. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable prize-winning device to open the big prize opening. The number of rounds is counted by a counter. Also, the execution time (round time) of the special winning opening control process is set in the special winning opening control timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305.

  Processing for opening a special prize opening (step S305): A process for confirming the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. When the closing condition for the big prize opening is established, the solenoid 21 is driven to close the special winning prize opening by closing the special variable prize winning device. In addition, the time (interval time) from the end of the round to the start of the next round is set in the big prize opening control timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S306.

  Post-winner opening process (step S306): When the interval time has elapsed, it is confirmed whether there is a remaining round. If there are remaining rounds, control to open the big prize opening is started. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable prize-winning device to open the big prize opening. The number of rounds is counted by a counter. Also, the execution time (round time) of the special winning opening control process is set in the special winning opening control timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305. On the other hand, when all rounds are finished, an effect control command (ending command) for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform an effect (ending effect) for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is issued. After transmitting to the effect control board 80 and setting the execution time of the big hit end process (big hit end time) in the big prize opening control timer, the internal state is updated to a value according to step S307.

  Big hit end process (step S307): A predetermined flag set / reset process for ending the big hit gaming state is performed. Then, the internal state is updated to a value corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): When the small hit display time or interval time has elapsed, it is checked whether there is a remaining round. If there are remaining rounds, control to open the big prize opening is started. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable prize-winning device to open the big prize opening. The number of rounds is counted by a counter. Also, the execution time (round time) of the small hit release process is set in the big prize opening control timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S309. On the other hand, when all rounds are finished, after setting the execution time of the small hit end process (small hit end time) in the big prize opening control timer, the internal state is updated to a value according to step S310.

  Small hit opening process (step S309): A process for confirming the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition for the big prize opening is established, the solenoid 21 is driven to close the special winning prize opening by closing the special variable prize winning device. Then, the time (interval time) from the end of the round to the start of the next round is set in the big prize opening control timer, and the internal state is updated to a value according to step S308.

  Small hit ending process (step S310): A predetermined flag setting / resetting process for ending the small hit gaming state is performed. Then, the internal state is updated to a value corresponding to step S300.

  16 and 17 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control board 80. FIG. In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration. The first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In the example shown in FIG. 16, commands 8000 (H) to 806 A (H) are effect control commands (variation) for designating a variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the variable display device 9 in response to variable display of special symbols. Pattern command). The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start.

  Commands 8 </ b> C <b> 00 (H) to 8 </ b> C <b> 06 (H) are effect control commands for designating the contents of the stop symbols (display results) of the decorative symbols in the variable display device 9. In this embodiment, commands 8C00 (H) to 8C06 (H) are referred to as symbol information designation commands.

  The command 8C00 (H) is an effect control command (outgoing designation command) for designating that the stop symbol (display result) of the special symbol is determined as the offcoming symbol. Command 8C01 (H) is an effect control command (ordinary big hit designation command) that designates that the stop symbol of the special symbol has been decided as a non-probable variation symbol (that is, a non-probability variation big hit (also referred to as a normal big hit)). ).

  Command 8C02 (H) is an effect control command (designated to specify that the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be a probable variation symbol (that is, probable variation jackpot is determined), and that a re-lottery effect is not to be executed after the jackpot game starts. 1 specified command per probability variation. Command 8C03 (H) is an effect control command (probability variable big hit 2 designation command) that designates that the stop symbol of the special symbol is decided as the probability varying symbol and that it is decided to execute the re-lottery effect during the big hit game. Command 8C04 (H) is an effect control command (probability variable big hit) that specifies that the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be a probable change symbol and that a re-lottery effect is determined to be executed after the jackpot game ends (during the ending effect). 3 designation command).

  Command 8C05 (H) is an effect control command (suddenly probable big hit designation command) for designating that the stop symbol of the special symbol has been suddenly determined to be a probable change symbol (that is, that it has been determined to be suddenly probable big hit). Command 8C06 (H) is an effect control command (small hit designation command) that designates that the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined as the small hit symbol (that is, determined as the small hit symbol).

  Here, the “re-lottery effect” refers to an effect that makes it appear that the jackpot symbol is re-lotted and displayed after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9. Specifically, when it is determined in advance that the jackpot symbol (non-probability variable symbol or probability variable symbol) is derived and displayed on the variable display device 9, the left, right and right decorative symbols are the same in the variable display device 9. This is an effect of deriving and displaying a jackpot symbol (non-probability variation symbol or probability variation symbol) after stopping and displaying the non-probability variation symbol and then changing the non-probability variation symbol again (see FIG. 121). The re-lottery effect includes a case where a non-probable variable symbol is promoted to a probable variable symbol (when a non-probable variable symbol is displayed after being stopped), and a case where a non-probable variable symbol is not promoted to a probable variable symbol (a non-probable variable symbol is displayed). When the non-probable variation symbol is derived and displayed again after the stop display. The re-lottery effect that promotes a non-probable variable symbol to a probabilistic symbol is called “promotion effect” or “rising effect”.

  In this embodiment, the timing for executing the re-drawing effect is “during symbol change”, “during big hit game”, “after big hit game is over”. When the game control microcomputer 560 causes the effect control microcomputer 100 to execute the re-lottery effect during “in the process of changing the symbol”, the game control microcomputer 560 specifies the execution of the re-lottery effect using the change pattern command. Further, when the game control microcomputer 560 causes the production control microcomputer 100 to execute the re-lottery effect “during the big hit game” or “after the big hit game is finished”, the “in jackpot game” is executed by the symbol information designation command. Alternatively, the execution of the re-drawing effect “after the end of the big hit game” is designated. The effect control microcomputer 100 executes the re-lottery effect at a predetermined timing based on the contents of the variation pattern command or the symbol information designation command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (decorative symbol stop designation command) for designating stop of variable display (fluctuation) of decorative symbols on the variable display device 9.

  Commands 9500 (H) to 9503 (H) are effect control commands (background designation commands) for designating background display according to the gaming state in the variable display device 9. Command 9500 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the variable display device 9 is in the normal gaming state. The command 9501 (H) is an effect control command (high probability state background designation command) for designating background display when the variable display device 9 is in the probability variation state (high probability state). The command 9502 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state background designation command) for designating background display when the variable display device 9 is in the time-short state. The command 9503 (H) is an effect control command (chance state background designation command) for designating background display when the variable display device 9 is in the chance mode state. The chance mode is an effect mode in which an expectation for the transition to the probability change state is given after the sudden probability big hit and the small hit end.

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating display during the customer waiting demonstration.

  In the example shown in FIG. 17, commands A000 (H) to A004 (H) are effect control commands (fanfare designation commands) for designating that a big hit game is started. Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 1 designation command) that designates the start of a big hit when a normal big hit (non-probable big hit) is determined. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 2 designation command) that designates the start of a big hit when it is determined that the probability variation big hit is determined and the re-lottery effect is not executed after the big hit game is started. Command A002 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 3 designation command) that designates the start of a big hit when it is determined that a probability variation big hit is determined and a re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit game. Command A003 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 4 designation command) that designates the start of a jackpot when it is decided that a re-lottery effect is to be executed after the jackpot game is determined and the re-lottery effect is executed after the jackpot game ends (during the ending effect) ). Command A004 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 5 designation command) that designates the start of sudden probability variation jackpot.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (specifying command for opening a big prize opening) that designates display during a round in the 15 round jackpot game. The command A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big prize opening) that designates display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) in the 15 round big hit game. Note that the number of rounds displayed in “XX” is set.

  Commands A301 (H) to A305 (H) are effect control commands (ending designation commands) that designate the end of the big hit game. The command A301 (H) is an effect control command (ending 1 designation command) for designating the end of the normal jackpot game (displaying that the game will shift to the short time state after the jackpot game is finished). Command A302 (H) is an effect control command (ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of jackpot when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is determined and the re-lottery effect is not executed after the jackpot game is started. Command A303 (H) is an effect control command (ending 3 designation command) for designating the end of the big hit when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is determined and the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit game. Command A304 (H) is an effect control command (ending 4 designation command) that is promoted to a probable variation symbol in the re-lottery effect after the end of the big hit game (during the ending effect) and designates that it will be a promising big hit. Command A 305 (H) is an effect control command (ending 5 designation command) for designating the end of sudden probability variation jackpot. Note that the command A 302 (H) and the command A 303 (H) may be a common command. In this case, the common command is an effect control command for designating the end of the jackpot when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is determined and the re-lottery effect is not to be executed after the jackpot game ends (during the ending effect). The

  Command A4XX (H) is an effect control command (specifying command for opening a big prize opening) that designates display during a round in a two-round big hit game (suddenly probable big hit game). The command A5XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big prize opening) that designates display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) in the two round big hit game (suddenly probable big hit game). In “XX”, the number of rounds is set.

  Command A600 (H) is an effect control command (small hit fanfare designation command) that designates that a small hit game is to be started.

  The command C0XX (H) is an effect control command (start winning memory designation command) for designating the number of starting winning memories indicated by XX.

  When the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31, the contents shown in FIGS. Accordingly, the display state of the variable display device 9 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. Note that effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. For example, when displaying the number of winning balls that is a big hit on the variable display device 9, an effect control command for designating the count number of the count switch 23 is also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

  18 and 19 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a variation pattern used in this embodiment. 18 and 19, “S” of “line” indicates that single reach (one of 1UH to 8UH, 1LH to 8LH, 1CH to 8CH in FIG. 3) is established, and “W” of “line”. Indicates that double reach (any one of 1WH to 8WH in FIG. 3) is established, and “S & W” of “line” indicates that either single reach or double reach is established. The “normal selection table” indicates the table number of the decorative design determination table selected in the normal mode (a state other than the chance mode), and the “chance mode selection table” is selected in the chance mode. The table number of the decoration design determination table is shown.

  In this example, each variation pattern has a variation pattern when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is “out-of-line” (a variation pattern dedicated to the loss) and a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (the stop symbol at the time of the variable stop before the big hit) The variation pattern when the symbol becomes “non-probable variation” or “probability variation symbol” (variation pattern for both probable big hit / normal big hit) and the stop symbol for the decorative symbol (the stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop before the big hit) are “probable variation” ”Is the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern dedicated to the probability variation jackpot) and the decorative pattern stop pattern (stop pattern at the time of variation stop before the big hit) is the“ non-probability variation ”variation pattern (usually dedicated to the jackpot Variation pattern), the variation pattern when the stop symbol of the decorative design is “suddenly probable variation” (variation pattern dedicated to sudden probability variation jackpot), and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is “suddenly probable variation” Or it is distinguished in the variation pattern when the "Koatari symbol" (variation pattern of sudden probability variation jackpot / Koatari combined).

  As a fluctuation pattern dedicated to outliers, a fluctuation pattern of normal fluctuation without reach in the normal gaming state, a fluctuation pattern of short-time normal fluctuation without reach in the short-time state (including the short-time state of probability change), and normal reach A variation pattern with (simple reach mode), a variation pattern with super reach A, a variation pattern with super reach B, a variation pattern with super reach C, and a variation pattern with super reach D are provided. ing. There are also provided a variation pattern that develops to super reach B after the chance eye A is temporarily displayed, and a variation pattern that develops to super reach D after the chance eye B is temporarily displayed.

  Here, “normal reach” refers to the case where the middle symbol changes rapidly after the reach is established, the change rate / direction of the middle symbol changes after the reach is established, or after the reach is established. There are cases where a character appears or the background changes after reach is established. However, in the case of normal reach, the mode of production is relatively simple. On the other hand, “super reach” combines a plurality of effects of normal reach, develops from normal reach to another effect, or executes an effect with a story. In the case of super reach, an effect that makes it possible to expect a big hit than normal reach is performed. In general, the fluctuation time is set longer in the super reach than in the normal reach.

  As a normal big hit / probable big hit combination variation pattern, a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern with super reach A, a variation pattern with super reach B, a variation pattern with super reach C, and a super reach D Variation patterns are provided. There are also provided a variation pattern that develops to super reach C after the chance eye A is temporarily displayed, and a variation pattern that evolves to super reach D after the chance eye B is temporarily displayed. In addition, when a double reach is established, the symbol that comes first (for example, “1” when the symbol “1” or “2” becomes a double reach is “1”) is a big hit (first hit) and the symbol that comes later ( For example, the same variation pattern is divided between the case of “2” when the double reach is achieved with the symbols “1” and “2”, and the case of a big hit (later hit). In this embodiment, the variation pattern for both the normal big hit / probable big hit is always “re-lottery” effect during the fluctuation of the symbol.

  As a variation pattern dedicated to probable big hits, a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern with super reach A, a variation pattern with super reach B, a variation pattern with super reach C, and a variation pattern with super reach D Is provided. There are also provided a variation pattern that develops to super reach C after the chance eye A is temporarily displayed, and a variation pattern that evolves to super reach D after the chance eye B is temporarily displayed. In addition, after reaching out of reach, the “save” effect (for example, an effect in which the character is destroyed and replaced with the big hit symbol) is displayed, and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed. Is also provided. In addition, when double reach is established, the same variation pattern is divided between the case where the symbol that comes first is a big hit (first hit) and the case that is a big hit if the symbol comes later (later hit).

  As a variation pattern exclusively for big hits, a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach C are provided.

  As a variation pattern dedicated to sudden probability variation big hit, a variation pattern for executing sudden probability variation entry effect is provided. A variation pattern for executing a time mission entry effect and a variation pattern for executing a sudden probability change / small hit common entry effect are provided as a variation pattern for both sudden probability change big hit / small hit.

  Here, the “sudden probability change entry effect” is a special effect that indicates sudden change into probability change. The player can recognize that the player has entered the probability change state due to the sudden execution of the probability change entry effect. The “time mission entry effect” is a special effect that indicates that a time mission (an effect that is a big hit when a mission is presented and the mission is achieved within a predetermined time) is entered. The “sudden probability change / small hit common rush production” is a special production that indicates sudden probability change or small hit. The player cannot determine whether or not the state has been shifted to the probability change state only by executing the time mission entry effect or the sudden probability change / small hit common entry effect.

  In this embodiment, when the “sudden probability change entry effect” is executed, the sudden probability change pattern (the chance chance for accuracy) is derived and displayed, and then the 2-round effect is executed and suddenly enters the probability change. The state is shifted to a state in which the effect (a kind of effect in the chance mode) is executed. In addition, when the “time mission entry effect” is executed, a suddenly probable symbol or a small hit symbol (a chance item for a small hit) is derived and displayed, and then an effect during the mission presentation (a kind of effect in the chance mode) ) Is executed. In addition, when the “Sudden probability change / small hit common entry effect” is executed, a sudden probability change symbol or a small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and then it is impossible to determine whether it has suddenly changed or a small hit (chance) The mode is shifted to a state in which a kind of effect in the mode is executed.

  In this embodiment, after the mission entry effect is executed and the chance eyes (suddenly probable symbols or small hits symbols) are derived and displayed, “predetermined outcome (for example,“ 7 in the middle of the left display area ”is displayed. When a mission (command) is issued in a stage during a mission, a specific reach, a predetermined chance shown in FIGS. When a predetermined outcome is derived and displayed in time), the player is controlled in a state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit, a transition to a probable change state, or a super reach). In this embodiment, when a big hit lottery is determined in the big hit lottery during the mission presentation, the mission is achieved (established) to generate a big hit. When the “predetermined outcome” is selected from a plurality of types as described above, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the predetermined outcome and designates it with a variation pattern command, thereby producing an effect control microcomputer. 100 (100) may be displayed (presented), or the presentation control microcomputer 100 may uniquely determine and display (present) a predetermined output.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, a predetermined variation time is preset for each variation pattern, and the production control microcomputer 100 specifies the variation time together with the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command. Is possible. In addition, the second byte of EXT data in the 2-byte effect control command is assigned to each variation pattern. For example, “00 (H)” is assigned as the “EXT data” to the variation pattern of the variation number 1, and “6A (H)” is assigned as the “EXT data” to the variation pattern of the variation number 91. The effect control microcomputer 100 recognizes the content (variation number) of the variation pattern from the “EXT data” assigned to the variation pattern command.

  20 to 22 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 560 can start the variation of the special symbol (when the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300, that is, the special symbol indicator If the special symbol change display is not made in step 8 and the big hit game is not being played or the small hit game is not being played (step S51), the start winning memory number (holding memory number) is confirmed (step S52). Specifically, the count value of the hold storage counter is confirmed.

  If the starting winning memory number is not 0, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the starting winning memory number = 1 is read and stored in the random number storage buffer of the RAM 55 (step S53), and the starting winning memory number 1 is reduced by 1 and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step S54). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the start winning memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the starting winning memory number = n−1.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the current game state (normal game state, probability change state, short time state, etc.), and sets the address of the background designation command transmission table corresponding to the game state to the pointer (step). S55). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a command set process (FIG. 36) described later (step S56). If the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, a normal state background designation command is transmitted. If the current gaming state is the probability variation time short state, the probability variation state background designation command is transmitted, and the current gaming state is a time shortening. If it is in the state, a short time background designation command is transmitted. In this embodiment, a chance state background designation command is transmitted when the mode is changed to the chance mode suddenly after the end of a game with a promising big hit or a small hit.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number from the random number storage buffer (step S57), and executes the jackpot determination processing module (step S58). The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process of comparing a jackpot determination value determined in advance with a random number value for jackpot determination and determining that the jackpot determination value is a jackpot if they match. Here, in the jackpot determination, when the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state, probability change short state), the probability of a big hit is higher than when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal game state and short time state). It is comprised so that it may become. Specifically, a high-probability jackpot determination table in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance and a low-probability jackpot determination table in which the number of jackpot determination values is set smaller than the high-probability jackpot determination table are provided. Keep it. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state. If the gaming state is a high probability state, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the high probability jackpot determination table to perform the jackpot determination process. If the gaming state is a low probability state, a big hit determination process is performed using a low probability big hit determination table. With such a configuration, the probability of a big hit is higher in the high probability state than in the low probability state.

  Whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state and probability variation time short state) is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag indicating that the game state is the probability variation state and the probability variation time short state is set. Is done.

  FIGS. 23A and 23B show the distribution ratios of the determination values in the jackpot determination table in this embodiment. FIG. 23 (A) shows the distribution ratio of the judgment value in the jackpot judgment table in the low probability state (normal game state and short time state), and FIG. 23 (B) shows the high probability state (probability variation state, probability variation short time state). The distribution ratio of determination values in the jackpot determination table at the time of As shown in FIGS. 23A and 23B, in this embodiment, the number of jackpot determination random numbers is 65536. That is, the range of the random number value for jackpot determination is 0 to 65535. The number of jackpot determination values at the low probability is 164, and the jackpot probability at the low probability is 0.00250 (1 / 399.6). The number of jackpot determination values at the time of high probability is 1640, which is 10 times the number of jackpot determination values at the time of low probability, and the jackpot probability at the time of high probability is 0.02502 (1 / 40.0).

  If the big hit determination module determines that the big hit is not made (N in step S59), the game control microcomputer 560 proceeds to the process in step S64 in FIG.

  When it is determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination module (Y in step S59), a big hit flag is set (step S60). The game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot type determination random number from the random number storage buffer (step S61), and hits the jackpot type (normal jackpot, probability variable jackpot, probability variable jackpot, jackpot that executes the re-lottery effect during the jackpot game. After the game is over, a process of determining a probability variation big hit for executing a re-lottery effect or a sudden probability variation big hit) is executed (step S62).

  The jackpot type determination process is performed using a jackpot type determination table. In the jackpot type determination table, as shown in FIG. 23C, a predetermined number of jackpot type determination random number values are assigned in advance for each jackpot type. Specifically, the number of random numbers for determining the jackpot type is 100 (that is, the range of the random value for determining the jackpot type is 0 to 99), of which 0 to 31 are assigned to “normal”, and 32 to 74 are assigned. “Probability change 1” is assigned, 75 to 81 are assigned to “probability change 2”, 82 to 96 are assigned to “probability change 3”, and 97 to 99 are assigned to “probability”. Here, “normal” indicates a normal jackpot, “probability variation 1” indicates a probability variation jackpot (no re-lottery effect), “probability variation 2” indicates a probability variation jackpot (execution of a re-lottery effect during the jackpot), and “probability variation 3”. "Is a probable big hit (execution of re-lottery effect by ending), and" surprise "suddenly shows a probable big hit. In FIG. 23C, the numbers (0.0008 and the like) shown below represent the ratio (probability) of occurrence of each jackpot type in one start prize (fluctuation). The game control microcomputer 560 determines the big hit type, that is, the normal big hit, the probable big hit (no redrawing effect), the probable big hit (during the big hit) depending on which range the random number for determining the big hit type read in step S61 belongs. Either re-lottery effect execution), probability variation jackpot (re-lottery effect execution at ending) or sudden probability variation jackpot is determined. In this way, by determining the big hit type, not only whether the big hit is a normal big hit, a probable big hit, or a sudden probable big hit, whether to execute a re-lottery effect (promotion effect) and what kind of re-lottery effect It is also determined whether to execute at the timing.

  The ratio of the probability variation jackpot that is apparent when viewed from the player, that is, the proportion that includes a specific symbol (design that is a probability variation jackpot when aligned on the active line) is 5/8 = 62.5%. That is, as described above, when the eight symbols of the numbers “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, and “8” are aligned on the active line, Among them, when 5 symbols of “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, and “8” are aligned on the effective line, the probability variation is a big hit. The ratio in which the symbol is included) is 5/8 = 62.5%.

  On the other hand, the probability of probability variation big hit (excluding sudden probability variation big hit) with respect to the probability of big hit of 15 rounds (normal round hit of 15 rounds and probability round big hit of 15 rounds), that is, “normal” “probability variation 1” “probability variation” As shown in FIG. 23C, the ratio at which “probability variation 1”, “probability variation 2”, and “probability variation 3” are determined with respect to the ratio in which “2” and “probability variation 3” are determined is (43 + 7 + 15) / (32 + 43 + 7 + 15) = 65 / 97≈67%. Also, the probability that the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed when the decoration symbol variation is stopped with respect to the probability that the jackpot symbol indicating the big hit of 15 rounds is derived and displayed when the variation variation of the decoration symbol is stopped, that is, “normal” “probability variation 1” “probability variation 2”. The ratio at which “probability variation 1” is determined relative to the ratio at which “probability variation 3” is determined is (43) / (32 + 43 + 7 + 15) = 43 / 97≈44.3% as shown in FIG. is there. That is, when the big hit of 15 rounds ("normal", "probability change 1", "probability change 2", "probability change 3") is determined, when the normal big hit is determined (when "normal" is determined), A variation pattern command dedicated to normal big hit is sent, and a non-probable variation symbol is determined as a stop symbol at the time of variation stop based on that command, or a variation pattern command for both probable big hit / normal big hit is sent and normal big hit Designated symbol information designation commands are transmitted, and a non-probable variation symbol is determined as a halt symbol at the time of variation stop based on those commands. In addition, when it is decided to promote to a probable big hit in the re-draw lottery effect after the start of the big hit game (when “probable change 2” or “probable change 3” is determined), a variation pattern command dedicated to normal big hit is sent Based on the command, the non-probable variation symbol is determined as the stop symbol at the time of variation stop, or the variation pattern command for both probable big hit / normal big hit is transmitted and the design with two probable big hits or three probable big hits is designated An information designation command is transmitted, and an uncertain variable symbol is determined as a stop symbol at the time of a variable stop based on these commands. On the other hand, out of the cases where 15 round big hits (“normal”, “probability change 1”, “probability change 2”, “probability change 3”) are determined, when the probability change big hit (without re-drawing effect) is determined (“probability change 1” is When it is determined), a variation pattern command dedicated to probability variation jackpot is transmitted and the probability variation symbol is determined as a stop symbol at the time of variation stop based on that command, or the variation pattern command for both probability variation big hit / normal big hit is At the same time, a symbol information designation command with one designation per probability variation is transmitted, and a probability variation symbol is determined as a stop symbol at the time of a variable stop based on those commands. In this way, except when “probability variation 1” is determined, since the non-probability variation symbol is determined as the stop symbol at the time of variation stoppage, the probability variation symbol is derived when the decoration symbol variation stop for the probability of a big hit of 15 rounds. The probability of display is (43) / (32 + 43 + 7 + 15) = 43 / 97≈44.3%.

  As described above, the proportion of decorative symbols that include a specific symbol (the proportion of a specific symbol), the probability that a probability variation jackpot is determined relative to the probability of a big hit of 15 rounds (the proportion of probability variation jackpots), and 15 rounds The probability that the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed with respect to the probability that the symbol jackpot representing the big hit is derived and displayed is different from the probability that the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed. However, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the jackpot type regardless of the ratio of the specific symbol (step S62), and the effect control command (variation pattern command, (Design information designation command) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. Then, as will be described later, the production control microcomputer 100 is classified into the jackpot type (including the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect and the execution timing of the re-lottery effect) based on the content of the production control command from the game control microcomputer 560. A corresponding jackpot symbol is determined and displayed when the fluctuation is stopped (see steps S621 and S626). Therefore, it is possible to easily increase / decrease the ratio of a specific symbol according to the specifications of the gaming machine, change the ratio of probability variation big hit, or set a re-lottery effect after the big hit game starts.

  Although not shown in FIG. 20, there is only one special jackpot symbol depending on the jackpot type, so the jackpot symbol is automatically determined by determining the jackpot type. The Specifically, the non-probability variable symbol “6” is determined for a normal big hit (non-probable big hit), the probabilistic variable symbol “7” is determined for a probable big hit, and the sudden probable symbol “5” for a sudden probable big hit. Will be determined.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores (stores) the decorative symbol information corresponding to the jackpot type determined in step S62 in the decorative symbol information buffer (step S63), and proceeds to the processing of step S72 in FIG. .

  In step S63, after the decorative symbol information corresponding to the jackpot type is stored in the decorative symbol information buffer, the decorative symbol command control processing (step S28, FIG. 35) is executed in response to the occurrence of the timer interrupt, and the command set is set. Processing (FIG. 36) is executed, and command transmission processing (FIG. 37) is executed. Thus, a symbol information designation command (normal jackpot designation command, probability variation big hit 1 designation command, probability variation big hit 2 designation command, probability variation big hit 3 designation command, sudden probability variation big hit designation command) according to the big hit type is transmitted. Detailed contents will be described later.

  In step S64 of FIG. 21, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a small hit determination module that determines whether or not to make a small hit based on the value of the big hit determination random number read in step S57 (step S64). . The small hit determination module is a program that compares a small hit determination value determined in advance in the small hit determination table with a random number for determining a big hit, and executes a process of determining a small hit when they match. .

  FIGS. 23A and 23B show the distribution ratios of the determination values in the small hit determination table in this embodiment. FIG. 23A shows the distribution ratio of the determination values in the small hit determination table in the low probability state (normal game state and short time state), and FIG. 23B shows the high probability state (probability change state, probability change short time state). ) Shows the distribution ratio of determination values in the small hit determination table. As shown in FIGS. 23A and 23B, in this embodiment, the number of jackpot determination random numbers is 65536. That is, the range of the random number value for jackpot determination is 0 to 65535. As described above, the number of big hit determination values is 10 times higher at the time of high probability than at the time of low probability, but the number of small hit determination values is the same for both low and high probabilities. That is, the number of small hit determination values is the same 59 at both low probability and high probability. Accordingly, the small hit probability is the same 0.00090 (1 / 1110.8) for both low and high probabilities. Note that the number of small hit determination values may be increased at the high probability, and the small hit probability may be higher at the high probability.

  When it is determined that the small hit is determined by the small hit determination module (Y in step S65), the decorative symbol information corresponding to the small hit is stored in the decorative symbol information buffer (step S66), and the small hit flag is set. (Step S67). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S68). Although not shown in FIG. 21, when it is determined that a small hit is made, the small hit symbol “4” is automatically determined.

  In step S66, after the decorative symbol information corresponding to the small hit is stored in the decorative symbol information buffer, the decorative symbol command control processing (step S28, FIG. 35) is executed in response to the occurrence of the timer interrupt, and the command set is set. Processing (FIG. 36) is executed, and command transmission processing (FIG. 37) is executed. As a result, a symbol information designation command for designating a small hit (small hit designation command) is transmitted. Detailed contents will be described later.

  When it is determined in the small hit determination module that the small hit is not made (N in step S65), the game control microcomputer 560 reads the random number for symbol determination (one of the display random numbers) from the random number storage buffer. (Step S69) Based on the value of the read out design determining random number, a process of determining a special design out of design is executed (Step S70). One of the symbols “0” to “3”, “8”, and “9” is determined as the special symbol loss symbol.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the decorative symbol information corresponding to the loss in the decorative symbol information buffer (step S71). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S68).

  In step S72 of FIG. 22, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the big hit type determined in step S62 is a probable big hit, and if it is not a probable big hit (N in step S72), the big hit type Without setting the flag indicating that the process proceeds to step S82.

  When the probability variation big hit is found (Y in step S72), the probability variation big hit flag indicating that the probability variation big hit occurs is set (step S73). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation jackpot is a sudden probability variation jackpot (step S74). If it is a sudden probability change big hit (Y in step S74), a sudden probability change flag indicating that a sudden probability change big hit occurs is set (step S75), and the process proceeds to step S82.

  If it is not suddenly a probable big hit (N in Step S74), it is confirmed whether or not a re-lottery effect is executed (Step S76). When the re-lottery effect is not executed (N in step S76), the process proceeds to step S82, and when the re-lottery effect is executed (Y in step S76), the re-drawing effect is executed. A lottery execution flag is set (step S77), and it is confirmed whether the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit (step S78). When the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit (Y in step S78), the big hit execution flag indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed during the big win is set (step S79), and the process proceeds to step S82. To do. When it is not executed during the big hit (N in Step S78), it is confirmed whether or not the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending (Step S80). When the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending (Y in step S80), an ending execution flag indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending is set (step S81), and the process proceeds to step S82. . In step S82, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S82).

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S201). When the big hit flag is set (Y in step S201), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the sudden probability change flag is set (step S202). If the sudden probability change flag is set (Y in step S202), since sudden probability change big hit will occur, it is decided to use the sudden probability change variation pattern determination table (step S203).

  In the variation pattern determination table for sudden probability variation, variation patterns (variation numbers “89” to “91”) selected at the time of the sudden probability variation big hit shown in FIG. 19 are set in advance. Is assigned.

  If the probability change flag is not suddenly set (N in step S202), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the probability change big hit flag is set (step S204A). When the probability variation big hit flag is set (Y in step S204A), it is confirmed whether or not the re-lottery execution flag is set (step S204B). When the probability variation jackpot flag is set and the re-lottery execution flag is not set (N in step S204B), a probability variation jackpot that does not execute the re-lottery effect after the big-hit game is started occurs, so the variation pattern for probability variation jackpot It is decided to use the decision table (step S205).

  In the variation pattern determination table for probability variation big hit, variation patterns (variation numbers “20” to “84”) selected in advance for the probability variation big hit shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. Judgment value is assigned.

  When the probability variation big hit flag is not set (N in step S204A), since a normal big hit (non-probable variation big hit) occurs, it is decided to use the normal big hit variation pattern determination table (step S206). In addition, although the probability variation jackpot flag is set, if the re-lottery execution flag is also set (Y in step S204B), a probability variation jackpot that executes the re-lottery effect after the big-hit game starts occurs. In this case, since a non-probable variation symbol is derived and displayed when the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped, it is usually necessary to select a variation pattern for jackpot. Therefore, it is determined to use the normal big hit variation pattern determination table (step S206).

  In the normal big hit variation pattern determination table, variation patterns (variation numbers “62” to “88”) selected in the normal big hit shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 are set in advance, and a plurality of variation patterns are assigned to each variation pattern. A judgment value is assigned.

  The game control microcomputer 560 reads the variation pattern determination random number from the random number storage buffer, and based on the value of the read variation pattern determination random number, sudden variation variation determination table for probability variation, variation pattern determination table for probability variation big hit or normal A symbol variation pattern is determined using the big hit variation pattern determination table (step S207). Specifically, the variation pattern corresponding to the determination value that matches the variation pattern determination random value is determined as the variation pattern of the symbol to be variably displayed next. Then, the process proceeds to step S213.

  If it is determined in step S201 that the big hit flag is not set (N in step S201), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S208). When the small hit flag is set (Y in step S208), since a small hit occurs, it is determined to use the small hit variation pattern determination table (step S209).

  In the variation pattern determination table for small hits, variation patterns (variation numbers “89” and “90”) selected at the time of the small hit shown in FIG. 19 are set in advance, and a plurality of determination values are set for each variation pattern. Assigned.

  When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S208), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the time reduction flag is set (step S210). When the time reduction flag is not set (N in step S210), it is determined to use the normal time deviation variation pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state (step S211).

  In the normal time deviation variation pattern determination table, variation patterns (variation numbers “1”, “3” to “19”) selected at the time of deviation in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 18 are set in advance. A plurality of judgment values are assigned to the variation pattern.

  On the other hand, when the hour / hour flag is set (Y in step S210), it is decided to use the hour / hour deviation variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state (step S212).

  The fluctuation pattern determination table for deviation in time reduction is set in advance with a variation pattern (variation numbers “2” to “19”) selected in the event of deviation in the time reduction state (including the short period in probability variation) shown in FIG. A plurality of determination values are assigned to each variation pattern.

  Then, as described above, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the variation pattern determination random number from the random number storage buffer, and based on the read variation pattern determination random number value, the small hit variation pattern determination table, normal time A symbol variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table for deviation or the variation pattern determination table for deviation in time and time (step S207). Then, the process proceeds to step S213.

  In the case of the probability variation state, the variation pattern determination table for deviation is used in the normal time as in the normal gaming state. A variation table is determined using the determination table.

  In step S213, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the variation pattern command data corresponding to the variation pattern determined in step S207 in the variation pattern buffer (step S213). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the variation time in the special symbol process timer (step S214). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the address of the variable command transmission table in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer (step S215). In response to this processing being performed, control for transmitting the variation pattern command is executed in the decorative symbol command control processing (step S28 in FIG. 13, FIG. 35). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a variation number monitoring process (step S216).

  In the fluctuation count monitoring process, the game control microcomputer 560 is changed to a short-time state (except for the short-time state at the time of probability change) after the big hit game ends (when the short-time flag is set), a special symbol after the big hit game ends. The number of fluctuations is counted with a fluctuation number counter. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms whether or not the count value of the fluctuation count counter has reached a value indicating a predetermined fluctuation count (for example, 100) that can continue the short-time state, and the count value is the predetermined fluctuation count. When the value becomes, the hourly flag is reset. As a result, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the big hit game ends becomes a predetermined number of fluctuations, the time-shifted state is shifted to the normal gaming state. Note that the fluctuation number monitoring process may be executed in the special symbol stop process (step S303).

  Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S302) (step S217).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S302) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, first, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the special symbol process timer by -1 (step S351). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the special symbol process timer has expired (that is, whether or not the value of the special symbol process timer is 0) (step S352), and if it has not expired (N in step S352) ) And the process is terminated. If the special symbol process timer has expired (Y in step S352), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S303) (step S353).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the game control microcomputer 560 stops the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and derives and displays the stop symbol (step S361). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the decorative symbol stop designation command transmission table in the pointer (step S362), and executes the command setting process (step S363). As a result, control for transmitting a decorative symbol stop designation command is executed.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S364). If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S364), the game control microcomputer 560 stops the jackpot symbol in the jackpot control timer that measures the time for controlling the opening / closing of the jackpot. The time from the display until the big winning opening is released (a big hit display time) is set (step S365). In the jackpot display time, an effect (fanfare effect) for notifying the player that the jackpot game is started is executed.

  Note that different jackpot display times may be set for the big hit of 15 rounds and the big hit of 2 rounds. In this case, for example, the jackpot display time is 3 seconds for a big hit of 15 rounds, and the jackpot display time is 5 seconds for a big hit of two rounds.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the fanfare command transmission table corresponding to the jackpot type to the pointer (step S366), and executes the command setting process (step S367). Thereby, control for transmitting a fanfare command corresponding to the jackpot type is executed. For the big hit type, the probability change big hit flag is set, suddenly the probability change flag is set, the re-draw lotion execution flag is set, the big hit execution flag is set, or the ending execution flag is set It can be confirmed based on whether or not. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S304) (step S368).

  If the big hit flag is not set (N in step S364), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S369). If the small win flag is set (Y in step S369), the game control microcomputer 560 displays the time from when the small winning symbol is stopped displayed to the big prize opening control timer until the big prize opening is released ( The small hit display time) is set (step S370).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the small hit fanfare command transmission table in the pointer (step S371), and executes the command setting process (step S372). Thereby, control for transmitting a fanfare command for small hitting is executed. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S308) (step S373).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S369), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S374).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the special winning opening in the special symbol process (step S304). In the pre-opening process for the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the big winning opening control timer by 1 (step S401), and confirms whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 ( Step S402). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S402), the processing is ended as it is. If the value of the big prize control timer is 0 (Y in step S402), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the number of big hits is 15 rounds or 2 rounds (step S403). ). If the probability variation jackpot flag is not set, or if the probability variation jackpot flag is set but suddenly the probability variation flag is not set, it can be determined that the round is a big hit of 15 rounds. When the probability variation flag is set, it can be determined that the game is a big hit of two rounds.

  If it is a big hit for 15 rounds (Y in step S403), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the command sending table for the 15 round big hits in the big prize opening opening command pointer to the pointer (step S404), and sets the command. Is executed (step S405). As a result, control for transmitting a 15-round big prize opening opening command for designating the display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round) is executed. The number of rounds is recognized by checking the value of a round number counter that counts the number of rounds in the big hit game. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to drive the solenoid 21 to open the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S406). In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, and the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the RAM area corresponds to the output state of the output port in step S406. Is set in accordance with the open / close state of the solenoid to be driven. Then, the contents set in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port in the output process of step S32 are output to the output port. As a result, a drive command signal is output from the output port to the solenoid circuit 59. The solenoid circuit 59 outputs a drive signal for driving the solenoid in response to a drive command signal to drive the solenoid. Hereinafter, in the process of opening and closing the solenoid, such an operation is performed.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S407). Since the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 in step S407, in steps S404 and S405, when the value of the round number counter is 0, a command for opening the big prize opening indicating the first round is transmitted. The process of S407 may be executed before the process of step S404, and when the value of the round number counter is 1, a command for opening a big prize opening indicating the first round may be transmitted.

  In addition, the maximum time (15-round round time) that can be opened in each round of the 15 round big hits is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S408). The round time for 15 rounds is, for example, 29.5 seconds. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S414).

  When it is a big hit of two rounds in step S403 (N in step S403), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the command winning table during the big winning opening release command for the two rounds big hit in the pointer (step S409). ), Command set processing is executed (step S410). As a result, a control is executed to transmit a two-round big prize opening opening command for designating a display state corresponding to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 drives the solenoid 21 to release the special winning opening (step S411) and increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S412). Since the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 in step S412, in steps S409 and S410, when the value of the round number counter is 0, a command for opening the big prize opening indicating the first round is transmitted. The process of S412 may be executed before the process of step S409, and when the value of the round number counter is 1, a command for opening a big prize opening indicating the first round may be transmitted. In addition, the maximum time for which the big prize opening can be opened in each round in the big hit of two rounds (round time for two rounds) is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S413). The round time for 2 rounds is a short time, for example, 5 seconds. Therefore, in the big hit of two rounds, ten game balls (the maximum number of game balls that can be won) will not win the big prize opening during the round. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S414).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening process (step S305) in the special symbol process. In the special winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the special winning prize control timer by -1 (step S421). And it is confirmed whether the number of big hits is 15 rounds (whether it is a big hit of 15 rounds or a big hit of 2 rounds) (step S422).

  If it is a big hit of 15 rounds (Y in step S422), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S423). When the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S423), it is checked whether or not the game ball has won the big prize opening by checking whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on. Confirmation is made (step S424). If the count switch 23 is not turned on (N in step S424), the process is terminated as it is. If the count switch 23 is on (Y in step S424), the game control microcomputer 560 increments the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening (step S425). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S426). If the value of the winning number counter is not the predetermined number (N in step S426), the process is ended as it is.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S423) or when the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step S426), the game control microcomputer 560 is Then, the solenoid 21 is driven to control to close the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S427). Then, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (step S428).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the command transmission table after opening the big winning opening for the 15th round big hit to the pointer (step S429), and executes the command setting process (step S430). As a result, control for transmitting a command after opening the big prize opening for 15 rounds that specifies a display state according to the number of rounds after the big prize opening is opened (after the end of the round) is executed.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a time (interval time for 15 rounds) from the end of the round to the start of the next round in the big win of 15 rounds in the big prize opening control timer ( In step S431), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening post-processing (step S306) (step S432). The interval time for 15 rounds is, for example, 5 seconds.

  If it is a big hit of two rounds (N in step S422), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the big prize control timer is 0 (step S433), and the value of the big prize control timer If is not 0 (N in step S433), the process is terminated as it is. When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S433), the solenoid 21 is driven to control to close the big prize opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S434).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the display command transmission table after the two-round big winning opening is opened to the pointer (step S435), and executes the command setting process (step S436). As a result, the control for transmitting a command after opening the big winning opening for two rounds for specifying the display state according to the number of rounds after the opening of the big winning opening (after the end of the round) is executed. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the time from the end of the round to the start of the next round (interval time for two rounds) in the big winning prize control timer (two rounds). In step S437), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening post-processing (step S306) (step S432). The interval time for 2 rounds is the same as the interval time for 15 rounds, for example, 5 seconds. The interval time for 2 rounds may be shorter than the interval time for 15 rounds. In this case, in order to make the contents of the sudden change big hit game and the small hit game the same, it is preferable that the interval time for the small hit is the same as or substantially the same as the interval time for the two rounds.

  FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 are flowcharts showing the special winning opening opening post-processing (step S306) in the special symbol process. In the post-opening process for the big prize opening, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize opening control timer by -1 (step S441), and checks whether the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 or not. (Step S442). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S442), the processing is ended as it is. If the value of the big prize control timer is 0 (Y in step S442), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the number of rounds is 15 rounds (15 rounds or 2 rounds Is determined (step S443).

  If it is a big hit of 15 rounds (Y in step S443), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is 15 (step S444). If the value of the round number counter is not 15 (N in Step S444), the address of the command transmission table for the 15 round round big prize opening open command transmission table is set in the pointer (Step S445), and the command setting process is executed. (Step S446). As a result, control for transmitting a 15-round big prize opening opening command for designating the display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round) is executed. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 controls to open the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) by driving the solenoid 21 (step S447) and increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S448). Since the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 in step S448, the value of the round number counter indicates the number of rounds to be started next minus 1 at the time of the processing of steps S445 and S446. However, if the process of step S448 is executed before the processes of steps S445 and S446, the value of the round number counter indicates the number of rounds to be started next at the time of the processes of steps S445 and S446. Can be.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a round time for 15 rounds in the special winning opening control timer (step S449). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S450).

  If the value of the round counter is 15 (Y in step S444), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the ending command transmission table corresponding to the jackpot type in the pointer (step S451), and sets the command Processing is executed (step S452). Thereby, control for transmitting an ending command corresponding to the jackpot type is executed.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the jackpot end time (execution time of the ending effect) for notifying the player of the end of the jackpot in the jackpot control timer (step S453), and sets the value of the special symbol process flag. The value is updated according to the big hit end process (step S307) (step S454).

  When the big hit end time is set in step S453, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the re-drawing effect is executed during the ending depending on whether the ending execution flag is set, and re-draws during the ending. When the effect is not executed, a shorter time than the case where the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending is set as the jackpot end time (end effect execution time). For example, 10 seconds is set as the execution time of the ending effect that executes the re-lottery effect, and 3 seconds is set as the execution time of the ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect. Thus, when it is not necessary to notify the transition to the probable change state by making the execution time of the ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect shorter than the execution time of the ending effect that executes the re-lottery effect In addition, it is possible to avoid that the production is unnecessarily performed for a long time.

  When it is a big hit of two rounds in step S443 (N in step S443), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is 2 (step S455 in FIG. 30). If the value of the round counter is not 2 (N in Step S455), the address of the command transmission table for the 2 round big hit big winning opening is set in the pointer (Step S456), and the command setting process is executed. (Step S457). As a result, a control is executed to transmit a two-round big prize opening opening command for designating a display state corresponding to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 drives the solenoid 21 to release the special winning opening (step S458) and increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S459). Further, the round time for two rounds is set in the special winning opening control timer (step S460). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S461).

  If the value of the round number counter is 2 (Y in step S455), the game control microcomputer 560 suddenly sets the address of the ending command transmission table for the probability variation big hit in the pointer (step S462), and sets the command. Processing is executed (step S463). As a result, the control for suddenly transmitting the ending command for probability variation big hit is executed. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the jackpot end time in the big prize opening control timer (step S464), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end processing (step S307) (step S307). S465).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the big hit ending process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize winning control timer by -1 (step S471). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S472). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S472), the process is terminated as it is. If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S472), the game control microcomputer 560 executes a game state setting process after the big hit (step S473).

  In the game state setting process after the big hit, the process of setting / resetting the probability variation flag and the short time flag according to the game state after the end of the big hit game is executed. Specifically, when the gaming state shifts to the short-time state after the big hit game ends, only the short-time flag is set, and when the gaming state shifts to the probability change state after the big hit game ends, only the probability change flag is set. When the gaming state is shifted to the probability change time-short state after the game ends, the probability change flag and the time-short flag are set. In addition, when the gaming state is shifted to the short-time state after the big hit game is over, the number of fluctuations that can be continued in the short-time state (number of time reductions, for example, 100 times) is set in the fluctuation number counter. When the probability variation state ends or the time reduction state ends, the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag is reset. Even if the processing for resetting the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag is executed in the special symbol stop process (step S303). Good.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 resets the jackpot flag (step S474). If the probability variation jackpot flag is set, the probability variation jackpot flag is reset (step S475), and the sudden probability variation flag is set. In this case, the probability variation flag is suddenly reset (step S476). If the re-lottery execution flag is set, the re-lottery execution flag is reset (step S477). If the big-hit execution flag is set, the big-hit execution is executed. The flag is reset (step S478). Further, if the ending execution flag is set, the ending execution flag is reset (step S479).

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S480).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the small hit release pre-processing (step S308) in the special symbol process. In the small hit release pre-processing, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the big prize opening control timer by 1 (step S501), and checks whether the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step). S502). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S502), the processing is ended as it is. If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S502), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is 2 (step S503). If the value of the round number counter is not 2 (N in step S503), the solenoid 21 is driven to control to open the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S504), and the value of the round number counter Is incremented by 1 (step S505).

  In addition, the maximum time (the round time for small hits) that the big prize opening can be opened in each round for small hits is set in the big winning prize control timer (step S506). Note that the round time for small hits is the same as the round time for two rounds (for example, 5 seconds). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit releasing process (step S309) (step S507).

  If the value of the round number counter is 2 (Y in step S503), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a small hit end time for notifying the player of the end of the small hit in the big prize opening control timer. (Step S508), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit end processing (Step S310) (Step S509).

  It should be noted that during the small hit game, the control for transmitting the special winning opening open command is not executed.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the small hit releasing process (step S309) in the special symbol process. In the small hit release process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize opening control timer by -1 (step S511). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S512). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S512), the processing is ended as it is. When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S512), the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to drive the solenoid 21 to close the big prize opening (opening / closing plate 20). (Step S513).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a time from the end of the round to the start of the next round (interval time for small hits) in the small winning of the two rounds in the big prize control timer. (Step S514), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (Step S308) (Step S515). The interval time for small hits is, for example, 5 seconds.

  In addition, during the small hit game, the control for transmitting the command after the big winning opening is opened is not executed.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (step S310) in the special symbol process. In the small hit end process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize opening control timer by -1 (step S531). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S532). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S532), the processing is ended as it is. If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S532), the game control microcomputer 560 resets the small hit flag (step S533) and sets the special symbol process flag value to the special symbol normal symbol. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the process (step S300) (step S534).

  In this embodiment, during the small hit game, it is configured not to execute the control for transmitting the command for opening the big prize opening and the command after opening the big prize opening. The command may be transmitted after the winning opening is opened.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol command control process (step S28). In the decorative symbol command control process, the game control microcomputer 560 loads the decorative symbol command transmission pointer onto the pointer (step S551), and loads the data pointed to by the pointer (step S552). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether it is the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command (variation pattern command, symbol information designation command, start winning memory designation command) (step S553). At this time, if it is the timing for transmitting the variation pattern command, the address of the variation command transmission table is stored in the decoration symbol command transmission pointer in step S215 of the variation pattern setting processing (step S301) in the special symbol process (step S26). The data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the variable command transmission table. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can determine whether or not it is the timing to transmit the variation pattern command based on whether or not the data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the variation command transmission table.

  When it is time to transmit the variation pattern command (Y in step S553), the game control microcomputer 560 executes command set processing. As a result, control for transmitting the variation pattern command is executed. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the pointer in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer (step S555).

  At this time, in step S572 of the command set process (FIG. 36) executed in step S554, the address of the command transmission table is incremented by 1, so that the address pointed to by the pointer is changed from the address of the variable command transmission table to the symbol information designation command. This is the address of the transmission table. Accordingly, in step S555, the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer.

  In the decorative symbol command control processing when the next timer interrupt occurs (after 2 ms), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the decorative symbol command transmission pointer again to the pointer (step S551), and stores the data pointed to by the pointer. It is loaded (step S552), and it is determined whether it is the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command (variation pattern command, symbol information designation command, start winning memory designation command) (step S553). At this time, if it is time to transmit the symbol information designation command, in step S555, the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer, and the data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table. It has become. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can determine whether or not it is the timing to transmit the symbol information designation command based on whether or not the data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table.

  When it is time to transmit the symbol information designation command (Y in step S553), the game control microcomputer 560 executes a command set process (step S554). As a result, control for transmitting a symbol information designation command is executed. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the pointer in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer (step S555).

  At this time, in step S572 of the command set processing (FIG. 36) executed in step S554, the address of the command transmission table is incremented by 1, so that the address pointed to by the pointer starts from the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table. This is the address of the storage designation command transmission table. Accordingly, in step S555, the address of the start winning memory designation command transmission table is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer.

  In the decorative symbol command control processing when the next timer interrupt occurs (after 2 ms), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the decorative symbol command transmission pointer again to the pointer (step S551), and stores the data pointed to by the pointer. It is loaded (step S552), and it is determined whether it is the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command (variation pattern command, symbol information designation command, start winning memory designation command) (step S553). At this time, if it is time to transmit the start winning memory designation command, in step S555, the address of the start winning memory designation command transmission table is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer, and the data pointed to by the pointer is transmitted to the start winning memory designation command. It is the address of the table. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can determine whether it is the timing to transmit the start winning memory designation command based on whether or not the data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the start winning memory designation command transmission table. .

  When it is time to transmit the start winning memory designation command (Y in step S553), the game control microcomputer 560 executes a command set process (step S554). Thereby, control for transmitting the start winning memory designation command is executed. The start prize memory designation command is an effect control command for designating (notifying) the current start prize memory number (holding memory number), but the start prize memory number is confirmed by the value of the reservation memory counter (step S54). , S314), the number is set as a value designated by the start winning memory designation command. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the pointer in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer (step S555).

  In this case, when the address of the command transmission table is incremented by 1 in step S572 of the command set process (FIG. 36) executed in step S554, the command transmission table for transmitting the decorative symbol command by the address pointed to by the pointer. The address is not shown. Accordingly, in the decorative symbol command control process when the next timer interrupt occurs (after 2 ms), the decorative symbol command transmission pointer is loaded again into the pointer (step S551), and the data pointed to by the pointer is loaded (step S552). Whether or not it is the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command is determined (step S553), but it is determined in step S553 that it is not the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing command set processing. As described above, the command set process is executed in steps S56, S363, S367, S372, S405, S410, S430, S436, S446, S452, S457, S463, and S554. The command set process is a process including a command output process and an INT signal output process.

  In the command set process, the game control microcomputer 560 first loads the command data 1 pointed to by the address in the command transmission table (step S561), and executes (calls) the command transmission process shown in FIG. 37 (step S562). .

  In the command transmission process shown in FIG. 37, the game control microcomputer 560 first outputs a transmission command (effect control command) to the output port 1 (step S581). As a result, the MODE data of the first byte in the production control command having a 2-byte structure is output from the output port 1.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the effect control signal INT output bit in the port buffer (step S582), and loads the port 2 buffer (step S583). In this embodiment, for example, “1” is set in the port buffer as an effect control signal INT output bit, and data “0” in the port 2 buffer is loaded. Then, the logical sum of the port 2 buffer and the port buffer is calculated (step S584), and the calculation result is output to the output port 2 (step S585). In this embodiment, when the calculation result is “1”, an on-state (high level) effect control INT signal is output from the output port 2. In response to the output of the on-state effect control INT signal, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a process of receiving (capturing) a transmission command.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a predetermined value in the wait counter (step S586), and subtracts one by one until the value becomes 0 (steps S587, S588). This process is a process for setting the ON period (high level period) of the effect control INT signal. When the value of the wait counter becomes 0 (Y in step S588), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the port 2 buffer (step S589) and outputs the port 2 buffer to the output port 2 (step S590). As a result, an effect control INT signal in the off state (low level) is output from the output port 2.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a predetermined value in the wait counter (step S591), and subtracts one by one until the value becomes 0 (steps S592, S593). This process is a process for setting the off period (low level period) of the effect control INT signal. When the value of the wait counter becomes 0 (Y in step S593), the process returns to the command set process in FIG.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 36, the game control microcomputer 560 adds 1 to the address of the command transmission table (step S563). Then, the address of the command transmission table is saved in the stack or the like (step S564).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 tests the work area reference designation bit (bit 7) of the command data 2 (step S565), and determines whether or not the value of the work area reference designation bit of the command data 2 is “0”. Is determined (step S566). If it is not 0 (N in step S566), the head address of the command extended data address table is set in the pointer (step S567), and the address is calculated by adding the value of bit 6 to bit 0 of the command data 2 to the pointer. (Step S568). Then, the data (command extension data) in the area pointed to by the address (pointer) is loaded (step S569).

  In the command extended data address table, EXT data (second byte data in a 2-byte effect control command) that can be sent to the effect control microcomputer 100 is sequentially set. Therefore, if the value of the work area reference designation bit is “1” by the above processing, the EXT data in the command extended data address table corresponding to the contents of the command data 2 is loaded, and the value of the work area reference designation bit is If "0", the contents of the command data 2 are loaded as they are. Even when EXT data is read from the command extension data address table, bit 7 of the data is “0”.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 executes (calls) a command transmission processing routine (step S570). Therefore, by the processing shown in FIG. 37, the EXT data and the effect control INT signal are transmitted at the same timing as the transmission of the MODE data. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 restores the address of the command transmission table (step S571), and adds 1 to the address of the command transmission table (step S572). When the address of the command transmission table is incremented by 1, if the address is the address of the command transmission table for transmitting the decorative symbol command, as described above, the decorative symbol command control process performs the decorative symbol command control processing. If the transmission process (command set process) is executed and the address is not the address of the command transmission table for transmitting the decorative symbol command, the decorative symbol command transmission process (command set process) is not executed in the decorative symbol command control process.

  As described above, the production control command having a 2-byte structure is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. In the effect control microcomputer 100, when the rising of the effect control INT signal as the capture signal is detected, the effect control command capturing process is started. Before the capture process is completed, the game control microcomputer 560 A new signal is not output to the signal line. That is, reliable command reception processing is performed in the production control microcomputer 100. The effect control microcomputer 100 may start the effect control command capturing process at the fall of the effect control INT signal. Also, the polarity of the effect control INT signal may be reversed (it may be at a low level when instructing command capture).

  Next, the transmission timing of each effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described.

  FIG. 38 is a timing chart showing the transmission timing of the effect control command when the 15-round jackpot game is executed. As shown in FIG. 38, when a start prize is generated, a start prize memory designation command (the start prize memory designation command at this time is a command indicating that the start prize memory number is incremented by one by the occurrence of the start prize) is transmitted. Is done. Then, every time the special symbol variable display is started on the special symbol display 8 based on the occurrence of the start winning prize, the background designation command corresponding to the game state is transmitted in the special symbol normal processing (step S300). . Also, in the special symbol normal process (step S300), the type of big hit is determined when it is out of place, big hit, small hit or big hit. In the variation pattern setting process (step S301), the variation pattern is determined, and a variation pattern command designating the determined variation pattern is transmitted in the decorative symbol command control process (step S28). Subsequently, in the decorative symbol command control process (step S28), a symbol information designation command corresponding to the losing, big hit (big hit type) and small hit determined in the special symbol normal process is transmitted, and further, a start winning memory designation command is sent. (The start winning memory designation command at this time is a command indicating that the start winning memory number has been decremented by -1 due to the start of fluctuation). In the example shown in FIG. 38, an effect control command for designating a big hit variation pattern is transmitted as the variation pattern command, and an effect control command for designating 15 rounds of big hit as the symbol information designation command (sudden probability change big hit and small hit It is assumed that an effect control command other than a command for designating is transmitted. Then, the special symbol variation time is measured in the special symbol variation processing (step S302).

  In the effect control microcomputer 100, the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560 shows a variation pattern dedicated to a loss, a variation pattern dedicated to a probable jackpot, a variation pattern dedicated to a normal jackpot, and a variation pattern dedicated to a sudden probability variation jackpot. If it is a variation pattern command, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9 is determined based on the command. On the other hand, if the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560 is a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern for both normal big hit / probability big hit or sudden variation for big hit / small hit, the pattern information received thereafter Based on the designation command, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9 is determined.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the variation of the decorative pattern in the variable display device 9 based on the reception of the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560.

  In addition, when the execution of the re-lottery effect is designated by the received variation pattern command, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the re-lottery effect during the variable display of the decorative symbols on the variable display device 9.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether it is a loss or a big hit or a small hit based on the symbol information designation command from the game control microcomputer 560. The presence / absence of execution and the execution timing are also confirmed.

  In the special symbol stop process (step S303), when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, a decorative symbol stop designation command is transmitted. When receiving the decoration design stop designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 derives and displays the already-decorated stop design of the design.

  If the stop symbol of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, a fanfare command corresponding to the jackpot type is transmitted in the special symbol stop process (step S303). Based on the fanfare command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a fanfare effect informing the start of the big hit game on the variable display device 9.

  In the big prize opening pre-processing (step S304), when the jackpot display time elapses, the big prize opening is opened, and a 15-round big prize opening opening command for designating the first round display is transmitted. The The production control microcomputer 100 displays the round display of the first round on the variable display device 9 based on the command for opening the big prize opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  When the round time elapses in the process for opening the special prize opening (step S305), the special prize opening is closed, and a command for opening the big prize opening for 15 rounds specifying the interval display after the first round is transmitted. The The production control microcomputer 100 displays an interval display on the variable display device 9 until the next round (second round) is started based on the command after the big winning opening is opened from the game control microcomputer 560.

  When the interval time elapses in the post-opening process for the special winning opening (step S306), the special winning opening is opened and a command for opening the special winning opening for 15 rounds specifying the round display of the second round is transmitted. . The production control microcomputer 100 displays the round display of the second round on the variable display device 9 based on the command for opening the big prize opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  By repeatedly executing the process during opening of the special winning opening and the process after opening the special winning opening as described above, the round display of each round and the interval display between rounds are displayed, and the round advances in order. In the special symbol normal process (step S300), when it is determined that the re-lottery effect is to be executed during the big hit game, it is repeated during a predetermined round (in the 15th round in the example of FIG. 38). A lottery effect is executed.

  In the fifteenth round winning opening opening post-process (step S306), when the interval time has elapsed, an ending command corresponding to the jackpot type is transmitted. On the basis of the ending command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes an ending effect informing that the jackpot game has ended on the variable display device 9. In the special symbol normal process (step S300), when it is determined to execute the re-lottery effect during the ending, the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending (in the ending effect). In the example shown in FIG. 38, the re-lottery effect is also executed in the ending effect. The re-lottery effect may be executed a plurality of times after the big hit game is started, but in this embodiment, when the re-lottery effect is executed after the big hit game is started, it is always promoted to a probable big hit. It will be executed only once. Therefore, when the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, the re-lottery effect is not executed during the ending.

  Thereafter, in the big hit end process (step S307), when the big hit end time has elapsed, after the big hit game state setting process etc. is executed, the process returns to the special symbol normal process (step S300) again, and the special symbol change starts. Is done.

  FIG. 39 is a timing chart showing the transmission timing of the effect control command when the two-round big hit game (sudden probability change big hit game) and the small hit game are executed. As in the case shown in FIG. 38, when a start prize is generated, a start prize memory designation command (a start prize memory designation command at this time is a command indicating that the start prize memory number has been incremented by one due to the occurrence of the start prize. ) Is sent. Then, every time the special symbol variable display is started on the special symbol display 8 based on the occurrence of the start winning prize, the background designation command corresponding to the game state is transmitted in the special symbol normal processing (step S300). . Also, in the special symbol normal process (step S300), the type of big hit is determined when it is out of place, big hit, small hit or big hit. In the variation pattern setting process (step S301), the variation pattern is determined, and a variation pattern command designating the determined variation pattern is transmitted in the decorative symbol command control process (step S28). Subsequently, in the decorative symbol command control process (step S28), a symbol information designation command corresponding to the losing, big hit (big hit type) and small hit determined in the special symbol normal process is transmitted, and further, a start winning memory designation command is sent. Is sent. In the example shown in FIG. 39, an effect control command that designates a variation pattern for sudden probability change or small hit as a variation pattern command is transmitted, and an effect control command that designates sudden probability change big hit or small hit as a symbol information designation command. Is sent. Then, the special symbol variation time is measured in the special symbol variation processing (step S302).

  If the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560 is a variation pattern command that indicates a variation pattern dedicated to a sudden probability variation big hit, the effect control microcomputer 100 stops and displays on the variable display device 9 based on the command. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined. On the other hand, if the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560 is a sudden variation / big hit / small hit variation pattern command, the production control microcomputer 100 is variable based on the symbol information designation command received thereafter. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the display device 9 is determined.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the variation of the decorative pattern in the variable display device 9 based on the reception of the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560. Furthermore, the production control microcomputer 100 suddenly confirms the probability change big hit or the small hit based on the symbol information designation command from the game control microcomputer 560. It should be noted that the re-lottery effect is not executed in the case of suddenly big hits and small hits.

  In the special symbol stop process (step S303), when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, a decorative symbol stop designation command is transmitted. When receiving the decoration design stop designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 derives and displays the already-decorated stop design of the design.

  If the special symbol stop symbol is a sudden probability variation symbol, a fanfare command designating the start of sudden probability variation jackpot is transmitted in the special symbol suspension process (step S303). If the stop symbol of the special symbol is a small hit symbol, a fanfare command designating the start of a small hit is transmitted in the special symbol stop process (step S303). The production control microcomputer 100 suddenly starts a probability change big hit game or a small hit game based on the fanfare command from the game control microcomputer 560. Note that when a probable big hit game or a small hit game is suddenly started, a two-round effect is executed. The effect for two rounds is a series of special effects that are executed from the start to the end of the sudden change big hit game or the small hit game. For example, when a probability variation symbol or a small hit symbol is suddenly stopped as a decorative symbol stop symbol, a special two-round effect such as a character appearing or a movie image is suddenly started. When the two-round production ends, the production mode shifts to a chance mode in which the transition of the probability change state is expected.

  When the probability change big hit game is suddenly started, in the big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S304), when the big winning display time elapses, the big winning opening is opened and the display state at the first round is designated. A command for opening a big prize opening for two rounds is sent. The effect control microcomputer 100 switches the display screen of the effect for two rounds executed in the variable display device 9 based on the command for opening the big prize opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  When the round time elapses in the process for opening the big prize opening (step S305), the big prize opening is closed, and a command after opening the big prize opening for two rounds that specifies the display state after the first round is transmitted. Is done. The effect control microcomputer 100 switches the display screen of the effect for the two rounds executed in the variable display device 9 based on the command after the special winning opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  In the post-opening process for the big winning opening (step S306), when the interval time elapses, the big winning opening is opened, and a two-round big winning big opening opening command specifying the display state at the second round is issued. Sent. The effect control microcomputer 100 switches the display screen of the effect for two rounds executed in the variable display device 9 based on the command for opening the big prize opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  In the second round big opening opening process (step S305), when the round time elapses, the big winning opening is closed and the big winning opening for two rounds big hit that specifies the display state after the second round is designated. A command is sent after release. The effect control microcomputer 100 switches the display screen of the effect for the two rounds executed in the variable display device 9 based on the command after the special winning opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  In the post-opening process for the special winning opening after the second round (step S306), when the interval time elapses, an ending command for designating the end of the sudden probability change big hit is transmitted. The effect control microcomputer 100 switches the display screen of the effect for two rounds executed in the variable display device 9 based on the ending command from the game control microcomputer 560.

  Thereafter, in the big hit end process (step S307), when the big hit end time has elapsed, after the big hit game state setting process etc. is executed, the process returns to the special symbol normal process (step S300) again, and the special symbol change starts. Is done.

  When the small hit game is started, the big winning opening is opened when the small hit display time has elapsed in the small hit release pre-processing (step S308).

  In the small hit opening process (step S309), when the round time elapses, the big prize opening is closed.

  In the pre-opening process for small hits after the first round (step S308), when the interval time elapses, the big winning opening is opened.

  In the second round small hit opening process (step S309), when the round time elapses, the big prize opening is closed.

  In the pre-opening process for small hits after the second round (step S308), when the interval time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the small hitting end process.

  Thereafter, in the small hit end process (step S310), when the small hit end time has elapsed, after resetting the small hit flag, the process returns to the special symbol normal process (step S300) again to start the change of the special symbol. Is done.

  In addition, during the round in the small hit game (similarly in the sudden probability change big hit game), the opening time (round time) of the big prize opening is short. For this reason, since 10 game balls do not win the big winning opening, the big winning opening is not closed within the round time. Accordingly, since the time from the start to the end of the game is constant, the effect control microcomputer 100 does not receive the command for opening the big prize opening, the command after opening the big prize opening, or the like, and displays the effect for two rounds. The state can be switched. Therefore, in the small hit game, processing for transmitting a command for opening a special prize opening, a command after opening a special prize opening, and the like by the game control microcomputer 560 is not performed. Note that, even in the case of a sudden probability big hit, the game control microcomputer 560 may not perform a process of transmitting a command for opening a special prize opening, a command after opening a special prize opening, or the like. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a command for opening a special prize opening, a command after opening a special prize opening, etc., but the microcomputer 100 for effect control is a command for opening a special prize opening from the microcomputer 560 for game control. Even if a command after opening the big prize opening is received, these commands may be ignored (the display state of the effect for two rounds is not switched).

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80. The production control microcomputer 100 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the start interval of the effect control processing (step S771).

  Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 100 performs a storage area setting command process for issuing a command for setting the storage area (storage area) in the VRAM 84 to the fixed address area 155A and the automatic transfer area 155B as shown in FIG. Is executed (step S772). The contents of the storage area setting command process will be described later (see FIG. 41).

  After executing the storage area setting command processing, the production control microcomputer 100 temporarily stores the image data set so as to increase the display frequency in the variable display device 9 in the storage area serving as the fixed address area 155A of the VRAM 84. A pre-transfer command process for giving a command to perform the command is executed (step S773).

  In the advance transfer command process, the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control CPU 101) instructs the VDP 109 to transfer image data of frequently used component images from the CGROM 83 to the VRAM 84. The image data transfer instruction designates an address in the CGROM 83 where the image data to be transferred is stored and an address (fixed address) of an area (fixed address area 155A shown in FIG. 100) where the image in the VRAM 84 is developed in advance. Is done. Based on the transfer instruction from the production control microcomputer 100, the VDP 109 reads image data from a predetermined address in the CGROM 83, and executes processing for transferring the read image data to a predetermined address in the fixed address area 155A in the VRAM 84. .

  The part image is a group of images such as an image of a character displayed on a part of the display screen and an image of identification information (decorative pattern). Component images include still images that are used mainly when displaying background images, sprite images that are used when displaying moving images in a simple manner, such as characters appearing or changing, and mainly live-action images. A movie image used when displaying a realistic moving image by a multicolor image represented by an image is included. Examples of frequently used component images include background images, decorative design images, and frequently used notice images.

  In this way, when power supply to the gaming machine is started, if image data of frequently used component images is transferred from the CGROM 83 to the VRAM 84 in advance, the CGROM 83 to the VRAM 84 are displayed when displaying frequently used component images. Therefore, the control load for display control of the variable display device 9 can be reduced. Details of the advance transfer command process will be described later (see FIG. 42).

  Thereafter, the effect control microcomputer 100 proceeds to a loop process for confirming the monitoring of the timer interrupt flag (step S774). When the timer interruption occurs, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a timer interruption flag in the timer interruption process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control microcomputer 100 clears the flag (step S775) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first analyzes the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S776). Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs effect control process processing (step S777). In the effect control process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the variable display device 9 is executed. In addition, various random numbers for determining the stop pattern of decorative designs (Random numbers for determining left symbols, random numbers for determining right symbols, random numbers for determining medium symbols, random numbers for determining reach, and extracting with reach determination) Counter value for generating a reach design random number or medium symbol determination random number), or a counter value for generating a random number for selecting a notice effect mode (preliminary selection random number) A random number update process for updating the above is executed (step S778). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S774.

  Timer interruption takes every 2 ms, for example. That is, the effect control process is activated, for example, every 2 ms. In this embodiment, only the flag is set in the timer interrupt process, and the specific effect control process is executed in the main process. However, the effect control process may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  As will be described later, when the display screen of the variable display device 9 is switched every 33.3 ms, the production control microcomputer 100 creates data instructing the image development on the VDP 109 in the display update command process. If it is not necessary to frequently execute the process (step S834B), the timer interrupt may be set to take every 33.3 ms, for example.

  The INT signal from the main board 31 is input to the interrupt terminal of the effect control microcomputer 100. For example, when the INT signal from the main board 31 is turned on, the production control microcomputer 100 is interrupted. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes effect control command reception processing in the interrupt processing. In the command reception process, the effect control microcomputer 100 stores the received command data in the command reception buffer.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the storage area setting command process executed in step S772. In the storage area setting command processing, the effect control CPU 101 sends STADD setting data and ENADD setting data from the ROM 102 as data for setting a storage area to be an automatic transfer area 155B as shown in FIG. Read (steps S161 and S162). Based on the setting data read in steps S161 and S162, a display control command serving as a storage area setting command is created and transmitted to the VDP 109 (step S163).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100, the VRAM 84 is divided into a frame buffer 156, a fixed address area 155A, and an automatic transfer area 155B, but the frame buffer 156 has a predetermined fixed area in the VRAM 84. It is assumed that it is set. Therefore, in the storage area setting command processing, in the area other than the frame buffer 156 in the VRAM 84, the setting of the start address and the end address of the automatic transfer area 155B is instructed to cause the VDP 109 to set the automatic transfer area 155B. As a result, the automatic transfer area 155B and the fixed address area 155A are set. It is assumed that the frame buffer 156 is not preset in the VRAM 84, and the presentation control CPU 101 instructs the setting of the start address and the end address of each area (for example, the fixed address area 155A and the automatic transfer area 155B), The VDP 109 may be configured to set each area.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance transfer command process executed in step S773 and the like. In the advance transfer command process, the production control CPU 101 first sets the advance transfer setting table (step S171). In the advance transfer setting table, image data indicating a part image set so as to increase the display frequency on the variable display device 9 among a plurality of types of image data is displayed on the screen of the variable display device 9. It is a table used for instructing to transfer from the CGROM 83 to the VRAM 84 in advance before being displayed. In this embodiment, the advance transfer setting table is composed of, for example, 3N + 1 (N is an arbitrary natural number) table data, and the table data read from the advance transfer setting table is a count value in the advance transfer counter. Determined by the pre-transfer count value.

  In the advance transfer setting table, as table data for specifying image data to be transferred from the CGROM 83 to the VRAM 84 in advance, the number of processes, read addresses # 1 to #N, write addresses # 1 to #N, image data Data indicating the quantities # 1 to #N and the like are stored. The advance transfer setting table is provided in the ROM 102 of the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 101 clears the pre-transfer counter provided in the RAM 103 and initializes the pre-transfer count value, which is the count value, to “0” (step S172). Then, the number of processes is set by reading the table data of the advance transfer setting table corresponding to the advance transfer count value being “0” (step S173).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 updates the advance transfer count value, for example, by adding 1 (step S174). Then, the reading address indicating the reading position of the image data in the CGROM 83 is specified by reading the table data of the pre-transfer setting table corresponding to the pre-transfer count value updated in step S174 (step S175).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 updates the advance transfer count value by adding 1 or the like, for example (step S176), and reads the table data of the advance transfer setting table corresponding to the updated count value. A write address indicating a write position where image data is temporarily stored in the storage area serving as the fixed address area 155A is specified (step S177).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 updates the pre-transfer count value by adding, for example, 1 (step S178), and reads the transfer data by reading the table data of the pre-transfer setting table corresponding to the updated count value. The amount is specified (step S179). Based on the read address, write address, and transfer data amount specified in this way, the effect control CPU 101 creates a pre-transfer command and transmits it to the VDP 109 (step S180). At this time, the number of processes is updated by subtracting, for example, 1 (step S181).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of processes updated in step S181 has reached a predetermined end determination value (for example, “0”) (step S182). At this time, if the number of processes does not reach the end determination value (N in step S182), the process returns to step S174. On the other hand, if the number of processes reaches the end determination value (Y in step S182), the pre-transfer counter is cleared and the count value is initialized to “0” (step S183), and then the pre-transfer command process Exit.

  43 to 45 are flowcharts showing the command analysis process (step S776) in the main process. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is stored in the command reception buffer. In the command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control microcomputer 100 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (background specifying command: 9500 (H) to 9503 (H)) for specifying the background in the variable display device 9 (Y in step S613), the effect control microcomputer 100 is used. Confirms the gaming state based on the content of the background designation command, and sets the confirmed gaming state in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S614). And the control which displays the background image according to a game state on the variable display apparatus 9 is performed (step S615).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (variation pattern command: 8000 (H) to 806A (H)) for designating a change pattern (step S616), the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the command EXT. Data is stored in the fluctuation pattern data storage area in the RAM (step S617), and a fluctuation pattern reception flag is set (step S618).

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command is a variation pattern command for specifying a variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit (step S619), and a variation pattern for both common big hit / probable variation big hit. If it is not a variation pattern command for designating (N in step S619), it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command is for designating a variation pattern for both sudden change big hit / small hit (step S620). If it is not a variation pattern command for designating a variation pattern for both sudden and promising big hits / small hits (N in step S620), the first decorative symbol determination process is executed (step S621). The detailed contents of the first decorative symbol determination process will be described later (see FIG. 46). When the variation pattern command is for designating a variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit (Y in step S619), or for the variation pattern command for designating a variation pattern for sudden probability variation big hit / small hit (in step S620). Y) A combined flag indicating that a variation pattern command designating a variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit or sudden variation for sudden big variation / small hit is received is set (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (design information designation command: 8C00 (H) to 8C06 (H)) that designates symbol information (Y in step S623), the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the symbol control command. A symbol information command reception flag indicating that the information designation command has been received is set (step S624). And it is confirmed whether the stop symbol of a decoration symbol has already been determined (step S625A). Here, if the variation pattern command is not a command for designating a variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable big hit or sudden variation / big hit / small hit, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol has already been set in the first decorative symbol determination process. It has been decided. Therefore, it can be confirmed whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol has already been determined depending on whether or not the dual-purpose flag is set.

  If the decorative symbol stop symbol has not yet been determined (N in step S625A), the production control microcomputer 100 executes a second decorative symbol determination process (step S626). The detailed contents of the second decorative symbol determination process will be described later (see FIG. 69). When the decorative symbol stop symbol has already been determined (Y in step S625A), the production control microcomputer 100 executes the redrawing effect after the symbol information designation command is a big hit, and promotes the non-probable variable symbol to the probabilistic symbol. It is confirmed whether it is a command for designating, that is, a command for specifying 2 per probability variation (8C03 (H)) or a command for specifying 3 per probability variation (8C04 (H)) (step S625B). If it is a symbol information designation command that designates promotion after a big win (Y in step S625B), the production control microcomputer 100 sets a re-lottery effect execution flag indicating that a re-lottery effect is executed after the big win ( Step S625C). If it is a command with 2 probable big hits, a re-lottery effect execution flag is set to indicate that a re-lottery effect is to be executed during the big win. Set an ending re-lottery effect execution flag indicating that this is to be done. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S625D), and uses the common jackpot symbol selection table (F-2) shown in FIG. 74 in accordance with the extracted random number value. Is determined and stored (step S625E). The probability variation symbol determined in this way is a probability variation symbol derived and displayed in the re-lottery effect executed after the big hit game is started. The contents of the common jackpot symbol selection table will be described later.

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (start winning memory designation command: C0XX (H)) that designates the starting winning memory number (Y in step S627), the start winning memory display control process is executed (step S627). S628). The start winning memory display control process is a process of performing control for displaying a display (start winning memory display) that can specify the start winning memory number in a predetermined area of the variable display device 9. In this process, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms the number of start winning memories based on the start winning memory designation command, and displays the confirmed number of start winning memories on the variable display device 9.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the start prize memory designation command is a start prize memory designation command for designating the start prize memory number -1 transmitted at the start of variation, that is, in the decorative symbol command control process. It is determined whether the start winning memory designation command is transmitted next to the symbol information designation command (step S629). Here, whether or not it is a start prize memory designation command for designating the start prize memory number −1, for example, in the start prize memory display control process, the start prize memory number designated by the start prize memory designation command is stored. The determination can be made by checking whether or not the number of start winning memories specified by the next received start winning memory specifying command is -1. If it is not the start winning memory designation command for designating the starting winning memory number −1 (N in Step S629), the process returns to Step S611. If it is the start winning memory designation command for designating the starting winning memory number −1 (Y in step S629), the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the symbol information command reception flag is set (step S630). If the flag is set (Y in step S630), it means that the symbol information designation command has been successfully received before the start winning memory designation command, and the process returns to step S611.

  If the symbol information command reception flag is not set (N in step S630), it indicates that the symbol information designation command has not been normally received before the start winning memory designation command. That is, it means that the symbol information designation command is missed in the production control microcomputer 100. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the decorative symbol stop symbol has already been determined in step S621 (step S631), and if it has already been determined (Y in step S631), the step S611 is performed. Return to processing. If the decorative symbol stop symbol has not yet been determined (N in step S631), a provisionally determined symbol determination process is executed (step S632). Temporarily determined symbol determination processing receives a normal big hit / probable variation jackpot variation pattern command, but if a symbol information designation command is missed, it temporarily determines a non-probable variation symbol and suddenly variation / big hit variation pattern command. Is received, but if the symbol information designation command is missed, the small hit symbol is tentatively determined. Detailed contents of the temporary determination symbol determination processing will be described later (see FIG. 95).

  In addition to the case where the symbol information designation command is missed, the symbol information designation command is not completely received, that is, the MODE information and the EXT data of the symbol information designation command cannot be received. Also included is a case where a command that is garbled data or the like and is not a symbol information designation command is received. For example, when the MODE data of the symbol information designation command is garbled, a command that is not a symbol information designation command (including a command that cannot be recognized by the production control microcomputer 100) is received, or the symbol information designation command EXT This is the case, for example, when an EXT data command (see FIG. 16) that is not defined as a symbol information designation command is received because the data is garbled.

  The EXT data of the symbol information specifying command is garbled. However, when a command defined as the symbol information specifying command is received, the symbol information specifying command which is a symbol information specifying command but is inconsistent in the control processing is displayed. It will be received. In this case, when the production control microcomputer 100 recognizes that the symbol information designation command has been received, the symbol information command reception flag is set (step S624), and the flag setting is confirmed in step S630 (step S624). There is a possibility that the provisionally determined symbol determination process is not executed (Y in S630) (step S632). However, if the garbled symbol information designation command is a command other than the normal jackpot designation command (8C01 (H)) or the probable variation jackpot designation command (8C02 (H) to 8C04 (H)), the decorative symbol has not yet been determined. However, it is possible to determine that the variation pattern command and the symbol information specifying command are not consistent with each other by receiving such a symbol information specifying command (N in step S631). In such a case, it is preferable to execute the provisionally determined symbol determination process (step S632).

  When it is determined in step S631 that the decorative symbol stop symbol has already been determined (Y in step S631), the provisional symbol determination process (step S632) is not executed. Even when it is determined that the symbol to be stopped has already been determined, if the symbol information designation command is missed (N in step S630), the non-probable variable symbol is temporarily determined in the temporary determination symbol determination process (step S632). You may comprise as follows. This is because if the symbol information designation command is missed, some abnormality may have occurred, and the contents of the variation pattern command may also have an abnormality such as data corruption.

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (fanfare command: A000 (H) to A004 (H), A600 (H)) that specifies the start of a big hit or a small hit (fanfare) (Y in step S633). The production control microcomputer 100 sets a fanfare reception flag corresponding to the content of the fanfare command (step S634). For example, depending on the contents of the fanfare command (such as the type of jackpot), a fanfare reception flag indicating the start of a normal jackpot, a fanfare reception flag indicating the start of a promiscuous jackpot (no redrawing effect), a promising big hit (a redrawing effect during a jackpot) Fanfare reception flag indicating the start of execution), fanfare reception flag indicating the start of probability variation big hit (execution of re-draw lottery with ending), fanfare reception flag indicating the start of sudden probability variation big hit, fanfare reception flag indicating the start of small hit To do.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not a command non-reception flag indicating that the symbol information designation command has not been received is set (step S635). The command non-reception flag is set in the temporary determination symbol determination process (see step S685 in FIG. 95). At this time, if the command unreceived flag is set, it means that the normal pattern of big hit / probable variation big hit combined variation pattern command or sudden probability variation big hit / small hit combined variation pattern command has been received, but the symbol information designation command is Since it is not received and it cannot be determined whether it is a probable big hit or normal big hit, or suddenly it is not possible to judge whether it is a probable big hit or a small hit, and the stop design of the decorative symbol has not been determined (decorative symbol determination process in the decorative symbol determination process) This means that the stop symbol is temporarily determined).

  When the command non-reception flag is not set (N of step S635), the process returns to step S611. When the command non-reception flag is set (Y in step S635), it is confirmed whether or not the big hit is a probable big hit (excluding the sudden probable big hit) based on the fanfare reception flag or the like (step S636). If it is not a probable big hit (N in step S636), the process returns to step S611. If it is a probable big hit (Y in step S636), the production control microcomputer 100 executes a third probable symbol determination process for determining a probable symbol as a decorative symbol stop symbol (step S637). Detailed contents of the third probability variation design determination process will be described later (see FIG. 96). The probability variation symbol determined and stored in the third probability variation symbol determination process is derived from the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game when the command non-reception flag is set (when the symbol information designation command is not yet received). It is the last stop symbol displayed.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not it is necessary to execute the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game based on the fanfare reception flag (step S638). Even if it is not necessary to execute the re-lottery effect, that is, even if the fanfare command designating the execution of the re-lottery effect is not received during the big hit or the ending (N in step S638), the re-lottery effect is performed. Must be executed. This is because, when a variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probable variation jackpot is received but a symbol information designation command is not received, a non-probable variation symbol is determined as a temporary jackpot symbol in the provisional symbol determination process (see FIG. 95). ) Since the non-probable variation symbol has already been derived and displayed, if the true jackpot type is a probabilistic large defeat (excluding sudden probabilistic large defeats), the probabilistic variation symbol is re-established so as not to give a disadvantage to the player. This is because it is necessary to derive and display the lottery effect. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts an execution timing determination random number (step S639), and determines the execution timing of the re-lottery effect according to the extracted execution timing determination random number (step S640). Then, a re-lottery execution flag corresponding to the determined execution timing is set (step S642). Specifically, when it is determined that the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, the re-lottery execution flag during the big hit is set, and when it is determined that the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending, A lottery execution flag is set.

  If it is determined in step S640 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed in the ending, the symbol information designating command is not actually executed in the ending, but the symbol information designation command is the microcomputer 100 for effect control. Since it was not received at ending, it was necessary to execute a re-lottery effect at the ending. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may execute an ending effect for when the symbol information designation command is not received (an ending effect of 3 seconds for executing the re-lottery effect). In this embodiment, since the execution time of the ending effect for executing the re-lottery effect is 10 seconds and the execution time of the ending effect for which the re-lottery effect is not executed is 3 seconds, the re-lottery effect is executed by ending in step S640. If it is decided to do so, an ending effect with an execution time of 10 seconds will be executed. However, if an ending effect with an execution time of 10 seconds is executed when no symbol information designation command has been received, the game control micro This is because the control timing on the computer 560 side does not match. Also, in order to synchronize the execution time of the ending effect between the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100, the ending is not determined as the execution timing of the re-lottery effect in step S640 (always the re-lottery). It is also possible to determine that a big hit is made as the execution timing of the production).

  On the other hand, if it is necessary to execute a re-lottery effect, that is, if a fanfare command specifying execution of the re-lottery effect is received during a big hit or ending (Y in step S638), it is specified by the fanfare command. The timing is determined as the re-lottery effect execution timing (step S641). Then, a re-lottery execution flag corresponding to the determined execution timing is set (step S642).

  When a variation pattern command for both a probable large hit / small hit is received suddenly, but no symbol information designation command is received, a small hit symbol is determined as a temporary stop symbol in the temporary determination symbol determination process (FIG. 95). See), and the small hit symbol is derived and displayed. Therefore, it is preferable to derive and display a sudden probability variation symbol in a redrawing effect so as not to give a disadvantage to the player when it is a sudden probability variation big hit instead of a small hit. However, since the small hit symbol is very similar to the sudden probability change symbol, it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the small symbol is generated by the stop symbol or whether the sudden probability variable big symbol is generated. For this reason, even if the game state is shifted to the probable change state even though the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, it is considered that the player does not feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in this embodiment, a re-lottery effect that suddenly promotes a small hit symbol to a probable variation symbol during execution of the two-round effect is not executed. However, such a re-lottery effect may be executed.

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (ending command: A301 (H) to A305 (H)) for designating the end of the jackpot (ending) (Y in step S643), the effect control microcomputer 100 has The ending reception flag corresponding to the content of the ending command is set (step S644). For example, depending on the content of the ending command (such as jackpot type), an ending reception flag indicating the end of a normal jackpot, an ending reception flag indicating the end of a promiscuous jackpot (no re-drawing effect), a promising big hit (re-drawing effect during a jackpot) An ending reception flag indicating the end of execution), an ending reception flag indicating the end of probability variation jackpot (execution of re-lottery effect by ending), and an ending reception flag indicating the end of sudden probability variation jackpot.

  If the received command read in step S612 is another effect control command, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a flag corresponding to the received command (step S645).

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the first decorative symbol determination process (step S621). In the first decorative symbol determination process, when the received variation pattern command is a variation pattern command dedicated to a disconnection (Y in step S651), a disconnection determination flag indicating that the disconnection has been determined is set (step S652). ), Whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern with reach is checked (step S653). If it is not a variation pattern with reach (N in step S653), the production control microcomputer 100 executes a reach-less loss determination process (step S654). The detailed contents of the reach-less losing determination process will be described later (see FIG. 47).

  If it is a variation pattern with reach (Y in step S653), the production control microcomputer 100 executes reach determination loss determination processing (step S655). The detailed contents of the reach loss determination process will be described later (see FIG. 56).

  When the variation pattern command is not the only variation pattern command for outliers (N in step S651) but is the variation pattern command dedicated to the probability variation big hit (Y in step S656), the production control microcomputer 100 indicates that the probability variation big hit has been determined. A probability variation big hit determination flag is set (step S657). Then, a first probability variation design determination process is executed (step S658). The detailed contents of the first probability variation design determination process will be described later (see FIGS. 64 and 65).

  If the fluctuation pattern command is not for the probability variable big hit only (N in Step S656) but is the normal big hit special (Y in Step S659), the production control microcomputer 100 confirms that the normal big hit has been determined. The normal big hit determination flag shown is set (step S660). Then, a first uncertain variable symbol determination process is executed (step S661). The detailed contents of the first uncertain variable design determination process will be described later (see FIG. 66).

  When it is not a variation pattern command dedicated to a normal big hit (N in step S659) but a variation pattern command dedicated to a sudden probability variation big hit, the effect control microcomputer 100 indicates that the sudden probability variation big hit indicating that the sudden probability variation big hit has been determined. A determination flag is set (step S662). Then, a sudden probability variation design determination process is executed (step S663). The detailed contents of the sudden probability variation design determination process will be described later (see FIG. 67).

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing reachless loss determination processing (step S654). In the reach-less loss determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a left symbol determination random number (step S1001). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the left symbol of the off symbol using the left symbol selection table (T-1) shown in FIG. 48 according to the extracted random number value (step S1002). In the left symbol selection table, as shown in FIG. 48, a plurality of determination values are assigned to each left symbol approximately equally. Note that the left symbol selection table (T-1) shown in FIG. 48 is a table for determining the middle symbol in the left display area of the variable display device 9. The numbers associated with each left symbol indicate the number of assigned judgment values. “Max 67” indicates that the number of random values is 67 (0 to 66). Accordingly, in the left symbol selection table, for example, the ratio at which the left symbol “8” is determined is 4/67. This also applies to other tables (for example, “max103” indicates that the number of random values is 103 (0 to 102)).

  The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value as the left symbol. The determined left symbol is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts the right symbol determining random number (step S1003). Then, according to the extracted random number value, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the right symbol of the off symbol using the right symbol selection table (T-2) corresponding to the left symbol shown in FIG. S1004). In the right symbol selection table, as shown in FIG. 49, a plurality of determination values are assigned to a matrix of left symbols and right symbols. A plurality of right symbol selection tables are prepared for each left symbol already determined. For example, when the determined left symbol is “8”, the uppermost table in FIG. 49 is the right symbol selection table corresponding to the left symbol “8”. Note that the right symbol selection table (T-2) shown in FIG. 49 is a table for determining the middle symbol in the right display area of the variable display device 9.

  In the right symbol selection table, the number of determination values assigned to the same symbol as the determined left symbol is “0” in order to prevent reach. For example, when the determined left symbol is “8”, the number of determination values assigned to the right symbol “8” in the right symbol selection table corresponding to the left symbol “8” is “0”. . When the left symbol is “*” (“*” between “7” and “8”), the upper symbol on the left display area is “7” and the lower symbol is “8”. , The right symbol “*” (“*” between “6” and “7”) where the upper symbol on the right display area is “7”, the lower symbol on the right display area is “8” The right symbol “*” (“*” between “7” and “8”), and the right symbol “*” (“8” in the lower display area on the right display area) The number of determination values assigned to “*” between “8” and “1” is “0”.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 selects the right symbol selection table corresponding to the left symbol determined in step S1002, and determines the symbol having the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1003 as the right symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1005). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the middle symbol selection table (T-3) shown in FIGS. 52 to 54 by using the chance prohibition table (T-4) shown in FIG. S1006). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol of the off symbol using the middle symbol selection table (T-3) selected in step S1006 according to the extracted random number value (step S1007). The middle symbol selection table (T-3) shown in FIGS. 52 to 54 is a table for determining the middle symbol of the display area in the variable display device 9.

  Here, as described above, in order to avoid the misunderstanding that the chance eye is derived and displayed when the outlier symbol is derived and displayed, in this embodiment, the chance eye (chance eye A, chance eye B, The control is executed to prohibit the derivation and display of the same symbol as the chance symbol for sudden chance (sudden probability variation symbol) and the chance symbol for small hit (small hit symbol) as a symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, a symbol (probable similarity symbol, small hit similarity symbol) similar to the chance item (probability chance factor (sudden probability variation symbol), small chance item (small hit symbol)) is used. Control is also performed that prohibits derivation and display as out-of-order symbols.

  FIG. 50 and FIG. 51 show arrangement patterns (chance eye prohibition patterns) of the left symbol and the right symbol in which chance eyes (including a sudden similarity symbol and a small hit similarity symbol) may occur. When the determined left symbol and right symbol correspond to the chance eye prohibition patterns shown in FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, chance eyes (including a sudden similarity symbol and a small hit similarity symbol) may occur. Accordingly, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the chance eye prohibition table to check whether the determined combination of the left symbol and the right symbol corresponds to the chance eye prohibition pattern. As shown in FIG. 55, in the chance eye prohibition table, the numbers of the chance eye prohibition patterns (“LR1” to “LR80”) are assigned to the matrix of the left symbol and the right symbol. For example, when the left symbol (the middle symbol in the left display region) is “8” and the right symbol (the middle symbol in the right display region) is “2”, the chance eye prohibition pattern “LR40” (FIG. 5). Corresponds to the forbidden pattern of the chance eye 40C shown in FIG. “LR0” indicates that it does not fall under the chance eye prohibition pattern. For example, when the left symbol is “8” and the right symbol is “1”, since it does not correspond to the chance prohibition pattern shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, “LR0” is assigned.

  In this way, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms which one of the chance eye prohibition patterns (LR1 to LR80) corresponds to using the chance eye prohibition table, or does not correspond to the chance eye prohibition pattern. (LR0) is confirmed. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the middle symbol selection table corresponding to LR0 to LR80 from the tables of FIGS. For example, when the combination of the left symbol and the right symbol corresponds to the chance prohibition pattern “LR40”, it is determined to use the middle symbol selection table associated with “LR40” shown in FIG.

  In the middle symbol selection table associated with “LR1” to “LR80”, the determination value is not allocated to the middle symbol that establishes the chance eye (that is, the number of determination values to be allocated is 0). . For example, in the middle symbol selection table associated with “LR40”, the middle symbol at the chance eye 40C shown in FIG. 5 (the middle symbol in the display area in the middle) is “1”. The number of judgment values assigned to is 0. On the other hand, in the middle symbol selection table associated with “LR0”, no chance is established no matter what symbol the middle symbol becomes, so the determination values are assigned almost equally to all symbols. ing.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 selects the middle symbol selection table in step S1006, and determines the symbol having the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1005 as the middle symbol. Thus, in the reach-less losing determination process, it is prohibited to determine the out-of-order symbol (including the sudden similarity symbol and the small hit similarity symbol) as the decorative symbol stop symbol.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing reach determination loss determination processing (step S655). In the reach determination loss determination process, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a reach symbol determination random number (step S1011). Next, based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617), the production control microcomputer 100 performs variation patterns with single and double reach (see “S & W” in FIGS. 18 and 19). It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is marked with "" (step S1012). As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, only the normal reach is a single / double reach, and the super reach A to D is either a single reach or a double reach. If the variation pattern has a single / double common reach (Y in step S1012), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the common reach symbol selection table shown in FIG. 57 according to the random number value extracted in step S1011. Reach symbols (same left and right symbols) are determined and stored using (H-1) (step S1013).

  In the common reach symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the reach symbols (reach patterns; 1UH to 8UH, 1LH to 8LH, 1CH to 8CH, 1WH to 8WH) shown in FIG. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the design of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1011 as the reach design.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1014). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol using the extracted normal symbol selection table (H-4) shown in FIG. 60 according to the extracted random number value (step S1015).

  As shown in FIG. 60, the symbol selection table during normal deviation is divided into types of normal reach (normal 8 frames, normal 12 frames, normal 15 frames, normal 17 frames), and the reach determined in step S1013. It is divided according to whether the design is single reach or double reach. Here, “frame” indicates the number of symbols (the number of symbols) in which the middle symbol proceeds (varies) after the occurrence of normal reach. For example, the normal 8 frames indicates that the middle symbol fluctuates 8 frames after the normal reach occurs. In each table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the symbol differences for the reach symbols determined in step S1013. Here, in the normal symbol selection table shown in FIG. 60, unlike the middle symbol selection table shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the middle symbol on the reach line is shown. For example, in the case of UH type reach, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the upper middle symbol is shown. In addition, in the case of double reach, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the symbol afterward (for example, “1” in the case of 1WH) is shown. Since the decorative symbols are 16 symbols “1”, “*”, “2”... “*”, The symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol is “−14” to “+1”. For example, the symbol difference “−2” with respect to the reach symbol “3” becomes the middle symbol “2”.

  In the symbol selection table during normal deviation, no determination value is assigned to the symbol difference “0” with respect to the reach symbol. This is because determining the middle symbol of the symbol difference “0” results in a big hit. In addition, in the symbol selection table during normal deviation for double reach, a determination value is not assigned to the symbol difference “−2” with respect to the reach symbol. This is because if the medium symbol of the symbol difference “−2” is determined when double reach occurs, a big hit will occur. The production control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1014 as the middle symbol.

  In step S1012, if it is not a fluctuation pattern with a single / double common reach (N in step S1012), the production control microcomputer 100 receives the contents of the received fluctuation pattern command (the fluctuation pattern saved in step S617). Based on this, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (a variation pattern having “S” in FIGS. 18 and 19) (step S1016). If the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (Y in step S1016), the production control microcomputer 100 performs a single reach design selection table (H-2) shown in FIG. 58 according to the random number extracted in step S1011. ) Is used to determine and store the reach symbol (step S1017).

  In the single reach symbol selection table, among the reach symbols shown in FIG. 3, a plurality of determination values are assigned to single reach reach symbols (1UH to 8UH, 1LH to 8LH, 1CH to 8CH). The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the design of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1011 as the reach design.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1018). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol using the super-development middle symbol selection table (H-5) shown in FIG. 61 according to the extracted random number value (step S1019).

  As shown in FIG. 61, the super development time symbol selection table is divided according to whether the variation pattern is for single reach or double reach. In the process of step S1019, a single reach table is used. In the super development time symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the symbol differences with respect to the reach symbols determined in step S1017. Here, in the super development middle symbol selection table shown in FIG. 61, unlike the middle symbol selection table shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the middle symbol on the reach line is shown. For example, in the case of UH type reach, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the upper middle symbol is shown. In addition, in the case of double reach, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the symbol afterward (for example, “1” in the case of 1WH) is shown. Note that a determination value is not assigned to the symbol difference “0” with respect to the reach symbol. This is because determining the middle symbol of the symbol difference “0” results in a big hit. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1018 as the middle symbol.

  In step S1016, when it is not a variation pattern with single reach (N in step S1016), the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation pattern has double reach. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the reach symbol using the double reach symbol selection table (H-3) shown in FIG. 59 according to the random number value extracted in step S1011 (step S1020).

  In the double reach symbol selection table, among the reach symbols shown in FIG. 3, a plurality of determination values are assigned to double reach reach symbols (IWH to 8WH). The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the design of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1011 as the reach design.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1021). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol using the super-development middle symbol selection table (H-5) shown in FIG. 61 according to the extracted random number value (step S1022).

  As shown in FIG. 61, the super development time symbol selection table is divided according to whether the variation pattern is for single reach or double reach. In the process of step S1022, a double reach table is used. In the super development time symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the symbol differences with respect to the reach symbols determined in step S1020. Note that a determination value is not assigned to the symbol difference “0” with respect to the reach symbol. This is because determining the middle symbol of the symbol difference “0” results in a big hit. In addition, no determination value is assigned to the symbol difference “−2” with respect to the reach symbol. This is because if the medium symbol of the symbol difference “−2” is determined when double reach occurs, a big hit will occur. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1021 as the middle symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it is a variation pattern with a temporary stop of the chance eye A based on the content of the received variation pattern command (variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S617). S1023). When the chance eye A is temporarily stopped and displayed, in this embodiment, the chance eye A is temporarily stopped and displayed when the normal fluctuation is stopped, and then an effect of developing into super reach is executed.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance A (Y in step S1023), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (step S1024). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the chance eye A using the chance eye A selection table (H-6) corresponding to the reach symbol shown in FIG. 62 according to the extracted random number value (step S1025). ). For example, when the reach symbol determined in steps S1017 and S1020 is “1UH”, “1CH”, or “1LH”, “1C” and “1C” among chance eyes A (1C to 40C) as shown in FIG. The chance eye A is determined using a table in which determination values are assigned to “9C”, “17C”, “25C”, and “33C”.

  As the chance eye A selection table corresponding to the reach symbol, in addition to the table shown in FIG. 62, a table corresponding to the reach symbol “1WH” and a table corresponding to the reach symbol “2UH” “2CH” “2LH”. , Table corresponding to reach symbol “2WH”, table corresponding to reach symbol “3UH” “3CH” “3LH”, table corresponding to reach symbol “3WH”, corresponding to reach symbol “4UH” “4CH” “4LH” Table, table corresponding to reach symbol “4WH”, table corresponding to reach symbol “5UH” “5CH” “5LH”, table corresponding to reach symbol “5WH”, reach symbol “6UH” “6CH” “6LH” , Table corresponding to reach design “6WH”, reach design “7UH” “7CH” “7 Table corresponding to H ", the table corresponding to Reach symbol" 7WH ", reach the symbol" 8UH "," 8CH "" table corresponding to 8LH ", a table corresponding to Reach symbol" 8WH "is provided.

  If the variation pattern is not accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance eye A (N in step S1023), the production control microcomputer 100, based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617), It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance eye B (step S1026). In the case where the chance eye B is displayed as a temporary stop, in this embodiment, the chance eye B is displayed as a temporary stop when the normal fluctuation is stopped, and then an effect that develops into super reach is executed. In this embodiment, when the chance eye B is displayed temporarily, the double reach super reach D is always developed.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance eye B (Y in step S1026), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (step S1027). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the chance eye B using the chance eye B selection table (H-7) corresponding to the reach symbol shown in FIG. 63 according to the extracted random number value (step S1028). ). For example, when the reach symbol determined in step S1020 is “1WH”, “41C”, “48C”, “49C”, “56C”, “56C” among the chance eyes B (41C to 72C) as shown in FIG. The chance eyes B are determined using a table in which determination values are assigned to 57C, 64C, 65C, and 72C.

  As the chance eye B selection table corresponding to the reach symbol, in addition to the table shown in FIG. 63, a table corresponding to the reach symbol “3WH”, a table corresponding to the reach symbol “4WH”, and a reach symbol “5WH”. , A table corresponding to the reach symbol “6WH”, a table corresponding to the reach symbol “7WH”, and a table corresponding to the reach symbol “8WH”.

  64 and 65 are flowcharts showing the first probability variation design determination process. The first probability variation design determination process is a process executed when a variation pattern command indicating variation patterns 20 to 61 shown in FIGS. 18 and 19 is received. The first probability variation design determination processing (processing to determine the decorative symbol to be derived and displayed as any probability variation symbol) is the probability variation big hit (no re-drawing effect) in step S62, that is, “probability variation 1” shown in FIG. It is executed when is determined.

  In the first probability variation design determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S1031). Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to execute the relief effect based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S1032). In the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the variation pattern in which “relief effect” is not executed is the variation pattern per probability variation.

  When the relief effect is not executed (N in step S1032), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation pattern per probability variation is present. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the variation pattern command (“S & W” in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19) based on the contents of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617) with a single / double reach. Is determined) (step S1033). As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, only the normal reach is a single / double reach, and the super reach A to D is either a single reach or a double reach. If the variation pattern has a single / double common reach (Y in step S1033), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the common jackpot symbol selection table shown in FIG. 74 according to the random number value extracted in step S1031. The probability variation symbol is determined and stored using (F-2) (step S1034). Thereafter, the process ends.

  In the common big hit symbol selection table, among the big hit symbols shown in FIG. , 8CF, 1SF, 3SF, 5SF, 7SF, 8SF, 1AF, 3AF, 5AF, 7AF, 8AF). The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1031 as the probability variation symbol.

  In the common jackpot symbol selection table (F-2) shown in FIG. 74, the number of determination values assigned to each probability variation symbol is not uniform. Specifically, a relatively large number of judgment values are assigned to the probability variation symbols of the right-down line (SF) and the right-up line (AF), and the upper, middle, and lower horizontal lines (UF, LF, CF) Relatively few judgment values are assigned to the probabilistic symbols. Therefore, the rate of the probability variation pattern of the lower right line (SF) and the upper right line (AF) is determined higher than the probability variation pattern of the upper, middle and lower horizontal lines (UF, LF, CF). . In addition, in other jackpot symbol selection tables (F-1, F-3, F-4, F-7 to F-16, F-17, F-18) to be described later, determinations distributed to each symbol. The number of values is uneven. Therefore, the ratio that a specific jackpot symbol is determined is higher than other jackpot symbols.

  In step S1033, when it is not the variation pattern with the single / double common reach (N in step S1033), the production control microcomputer 100 receives the content of the variation pattern command received (the variation pattern saved in step S617). Based on this, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (a variation pattern having “S” in FIGS. 18 and 19) (step S1035). When the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (Y in step S1035), the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the single jackpot symbol selection table (F-8) shown in FIG. 80 according to the random number value extracted in step S1031. ) Is used to determine and store a probability variation symbol (step S1036). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1043.

  The single jackpot symbol selection table includes a single reach probability variation symbol (1UF, 3UF, 5UF, 7UF, 8UF, 1LF, 3LF, 5LF, 7LF, 8LF, 1CF, 3CF, 5CF, 7CF, 8CF). Multiple judgment values are assigned to. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1031 as the probability variation symbol.

  In step S1035, when the variation pattern is not a single reach (N in step S1035), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation pattern is a double reach. Then, based on the content of the received fluctuation pattern command (the fluctuation pattern saved in step S617), the production control microcomputer 100 wins by the double tip or the double back (the symbol that comes first in double reach). It is determined whether or not the winning symbol is a winning symbol (step S1037). If it is a double tip (Y in step S1037), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1031, and the double tip jackpot symbol selection table (F-12) shown in FIG. Is used to determine and store a probable variation symbol (step S1038). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1040.

  In the double hit big hit symbol selection table, a plurality of judgment values are assigned to symbols (1SF, 3SF, 5SF, 7SF, 8SF) that are double wins among the probability variation symbols. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1031 as the probability variation symbol.

  When it is a double after hit (N in step S1037), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1031, and the double after hit big hit symbol selection table (F-16) shown in FIG. Is used to determine and store a probable variation symbol (step S1039). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1040.

  In the double hit big hit symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to symbols (1AF, 3AF, 5AF, 7AF, 8AF) which are double after hit among the probability variation symbols. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1031 as the probability variation symbol.

  In step S1040, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the pattern is a variation pattern with a temporary stop of the chance eye B based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617). Step S1040). In this embodiment, when the chance eye B is displayed temporarily, the double reach super reach D is always developed.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance eye B (Y in step S1040), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (step S1041). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the chance eye B using the chance eye B selection table (F-20) corresponding to the jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 92 according to the extracted random value (step S1042). ). For example, when the jackpot symbol determined in steps S1038 and S1039 is “1AF” or “8SF”, “41C”, “48C”, “48C” among chance eyes B (41C to 72C) as shown in FIG. The chance eye B is determined using a table in which determination values are assigned to 49C, 56C, 57C, 64C, 65C, and 72C. Then, the process ends.

  In addition to the table shown in FIG. 92, tables corresponding to each of the big hit symbols (“1SF”, “2AF”, etc.) are provided as the table for selecting the chance item B corresponding to the big hit symbol. That is, the chance eye B corresponding to the big hit symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  If the variation pattern is not accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance eye B (N in Step S1040), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (Step S1043). Then, in accordance with the extracted random number value, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol using the super development middle symbol selection table (F-6) shown in FIG. 78 (step S1044). Then, the process proceeds to step S1051.

  The medium symbol determined in step S1044 is a medium symbol that is displayed when developing into super reach in the middle of the fluctuation that becomes a big hit. Specifically, after the fluctuation starts and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are fluctuated at high speed, the left symbol and the middle symbol are stopped in order (temporary stop / fluctuation fluctuation) and develop into normal reach, and the middle symbol The speed is changed at a low speed, and then the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. The stop symbol of the middle symbol at this time is the middle symbol determined in step S1044. Thereafter, when the middle symbol is changed again at a high speed, the super-reach is developed. When the middle symbol is stopped, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined as the off symbol. The reach symbols at this time are the left and right symbols (left and right symbols of the left middle right probability variation symbols) constituting the probability variation symbols determined in steps S1036, S1038, and S1039. In addition, after developing to normal reach, it may be developed to super reach by increasing the changing speed as it is, without causing the low-speed changing middle symbols to be stopped and displayed. In this case, the middle symbol displayed at the timing of switching from the low-speed fluctuation to the high-speed fluctuation is the middle symbol determined in step S1044.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the super development time symbol selection table is divided depending on whether the variation pattern is for single reach or double reach. In the super development time symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the symbol differences for the reach symbols determined in steps S1036, S1038, and S1039. Note that a determination value is not assigned to the symbol difference “0” with respect to the reach symbol. This is because determining the middle symbol of the symbol difference “0” results in a big hit. When double reach occurs, a determination value is not assigned to the symbol difference “−2” with respect to the reach symbol. This is because, when double reach occurs, determining the middle symbol of the symbol difference “−2” results in a big hit. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1043 as the middle symbol.

  In step S1032, when the relief effect is executed (Y in step S1032), the effect control microcomputer 100 first extracts a temporary stop symbol determining random number (step S1045). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the variation pattern has a single / double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S1046). ). As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, only the normal reach is a single / double reach, and the super reach A to D is either a single reach or a double reach. If the variation pattern has a single / double common reach (Y in step S1046), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the common jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 76 according to the random number values extracted in steps S1031 and S1045. A temporary stop symbol and a final stop symbol are determined and stored using the selection table (F-4) (step S1047).

  Here, the “temporary stop symbol” refers to a symbol that is temporarily stopped before the relief effect is executed. Further, the “final stop symbol” refers to a symbol that is derived and displayed after the relief effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 76, the common jackpot symbol selection table includes a table for determining a final stop symbol (final stop symbol table) and a table for determining a temporary stop symbol (here, left and right symbols) (temporary symbol). Stop symbol table). In the final stop symbol table, the probability variation symbols (1UF, 3UF, 5UF, 7UF, 8UF, 1LF, 3LF, 5LF, 7LF, 8LF, 1CF, 3CF, 5CF, 7CF, 8CF, among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. (1SF, 3SF, 5SF, 7SF, 8SF, 1AF, 3AF, 5AF, 7AF, 8AF) are assigned a plurality of determination values. The temporary stop symbol table includes a table when the final stop symbol is “1UF” to “8UF”, a table when “1LF” to “8LF”, a table when “1CF” to “8CF”, The table is divided into a table for “1SF” to “8SF” and a table for “1AF” to “8AF”. In each table included in the temporary stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the same probability variable symbol as the non-probable variable symbol and the final stop symbol.

  The production control microcomputer 100 first determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1031 as the final stop symbol (probability variation symbol) using the final stop symbol table. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the temporary stop symbol table corresponding to the determined final stop symbol, and uses the temporary stop symbol (non-probable variable symbol or probable variable symbol) for the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1045. Design).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1048A). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol using the normal middle symbol temporary stop selection table (F-5) shown in FIG. 77 according to the extracted random number value (step S1048B).

  As shown in FIG. 77, the normal middle symbol temporary stop selection table is divided for each type of normal reach (normal 8 frames, normal 14 frames, normal 17 frames), and the temporary stop symbols determined in step S1047. It is divided according to single reach or double reach. In each table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the symbol differences (“−14” to “+1”) with respect to the temporary stop symbols determined in step S1047. Here, “frame” indicates the number of symbols (the number of symbols) in which the middle symbol proceeds (varies) after the occurrence of normal reach.

  In the normal middle symbol temporary stop selection table, no determination value is assigned to the symbol difference “0” with respect to the temporary stop symbol. This is because determining the middle symbol of the symbol difference “0” results in a big hit. In addition, in the normal middle symbol temporary stop selection table for double reach, no determination value is assigned to the symbol difference “−2” with respect to the temporary stop symbol. This is because if the medium symbol of the symbol difference “−2” is determined when double reach occurs, a big hit will occur. The production control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1048A as the middle symbol.

  For example, in step S1047, using the common jackpot symbol selection table (F-4), “1UF” is determined as the final stop symbol, “2UF” is determined as the temporary stop symbol, and in step S1048B, Assume that the symbol difference “−2” with respect to the reach symbol is determined using the normal middle symbol temporary stop selection table (F-5). In this case, the shifted pattern “212” (“***” in the middle line and “381” in the lower line) is temporarily stopped and displayed on the upper line. Then, the relief effect is executed, and the probability variation symbol “111” is derived and displayed on the upper line as the final stop symbol.

  In step S1046, if it is not a variation pattern with a single / double reach (N in step S1046), the production control microcomputer 100 receives the content of the variation pattern command received (the variation pattern saved in step S617). Based on this, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (step S1049). When the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (Y in step S1049), the production control microcomputer 100 performs a single jackpot symbol selection table (shown in FIG. 82) according to the random number values extracted in steps S1031 and S1045 ( F-10) is used to determine and store a final stop symbol and a temporary stop symbol (step S1050). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1040.

  As shown in FIG. 82, the single jackpot symbol selection table includes a table for determining the final stop symbol (final stop symbol table) and a table for determining the temporary stop symbol (left and right symbols) (temporary stop symbol). Table). In the final stop symbol table, a probability variation symbol (1UF, 3UF, 5UF, 7UF, 8UF, 1LF, 3LF, 5LF, 7LF, 8LF, 1CF, 3CF, 5CF, which is a single reach among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. 7CF, 8CF) are assigned a plurality of determination values. The temporary stop symbol table is divided into a table when the final stop symbol is “1UF” to “8UF”, a table when “1LF” to “8LF”, and a table when “1CF” to “8CF”. It has been. In each table included in the temporary stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the same probability variable symbol as the non-probable variable symbol and the final stop symbol.

  The production control microcomputer 100 first determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1031 as the final stop symbol (probability variation symbol) using the final stop symbol table. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the temporary stop symbol table corresponding to the determined final stop symbol, and uses the temporary stop symbol (non-probable variable symbol or probable variable symbol) for the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1045. Design).

  Note that, in the super reach variation pattern for executing the relief effect, a symbol difference between the temporary stop symbol and the left and right symbols is designated. For example, the variation pattern of variation number “27” shown in FIG. 18 is “+1 relief”, indicating that the symbol difference of the temporary stop symbol determined in step S1050 with respect to the left and right symbols is “+1”. Thus, the middle symbol of the temporary stop symbol is automatically determined based on the symbol difference designated by the variation pattern command. For example, when the temporary stop symbol is 2UF and the symbol difference specified by the variation pattern command is “+1”, the symbol “2 * 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the relief effect is executed, and the probability variation symbol which is the final stop symbol is derived and displayed.

  After the process in step S1050, it is determined in step S1040 that the chance eye B is not stopped (N in step S1040), and after performing the processes in steps S1043 and S1044 described above, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the received variation pattern. Based on the contents of the command (the variation pattern saved in step S617), it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance eye A (step S1051). When the chance eye A is temporarily stopped and displayed, in this embodiment, the chance eye A is temporarily stopped and displayed when the normal fluctuation is stopped, and then an effect of developing into super reach is executed.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance eye A (Y in step S1051), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (step S1052). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the chance eye A using the chance eye A selection table (F-19) corresponding to the jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 91 according to the extracted random number value (step S1053). ). For example, when the big hit symbol determined in steps S1036, S1038, S1039, S1050, S1055, and S1056 is “1UF”, “1CF”, or “1LF”, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. The chance eyes A are determined using a table in which determination values are assigned to “1C”, “9C”, “17C”, “25C”, and “33C” among (1C to 40C).

  In addition to the table shown in FIG. 91, the table corresponding to the big hit symbols “1SF” and “2AF”, the big hit symbols “2UF”, “2CF”, and “2LF” can be used as the chance hitting A selection table corresponding to the big hit symbol. A table corresponding to each jackpot symbol, such as a corresponding table, is provided. That is, as the chance eye A, the chance eye corresponding to the big hit symbol is selected.

  In step S1049, when it is not a variation pattern with single reach (N in step S1049), the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation pattern is with double reach. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 wins by the symbol that comes first in the double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617). It is determined whether or not the winning symbol is a winning symbol (step S1054). When it is a double front end (Y in step S1054), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random end values extracted in steps S1031 and S1045, the double front end jackpot symbol selection table (F -14) is used to determine and store the temporary stop symbol and the final stop symbol (step S1055). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1040.

  86. As shown in FIG. 86, the table for selecting the big hit symbol for double tip is a table for determining the final stop symbol (final stop symbol table) and a table for determining the temporary stop symbol (left and right symbols) (temporary symbol). Stop symbol table). In the final stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the probability variation symbols (1SF, 3SF, 5SF, 7SF, 8SF) that are the double hits among the big hit symbols shown in FIG. As the temporary stop symbol table, only the table when the final stop symbol is “1SF” to “8SF” is set. In the temporary stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the same probability variable symbols as the non-probable variable symbol and the final stop symbol.

  The production control microcomputer 100 first determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1031 as the final stop symbol (probability variation symbol) using the final stop symbol table. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the temporary stop symbol table corresponding to the determined final stop symbol, and uses the temporary stop symbol (non-probable variable symbol or probable variable symbol) for the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1045. Design).

  Note that the middle symbol of the temporary stop symbol is automatically determined by the symbol difference specified by the variation pattern command. After the temporary stop symbol that is the reach failure symbol is displayed temporarily, the relief effect is executed, and the probability variation symbol that is the final stop symbol is derived and displayed.

  When it is a double winning hit (N in step S1054), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the double winning hit bonus symbol selection table (F) shown in FIG. 90 according to the random number values extracted in steps S1031 and S1045. -18) is used to determine and store the temporary stop symbol and the final stop symbol (step S1056). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1040.

  As shown in FIG. 90, the double rear hit big hit symbol selection table includes a table for determining the final stop symbol (final stop symbol table) and a table for determining the temporary stop symbol (left and right symbols) (temporary symbol). Stop symbol table). In the final stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the probability variation symbols (1AF, 3AF, 5AF, 7AF, 8AF) which are double hits among the big hit symbols shown in FIG. As the temporary stop symbol table, only the table when the final stop symbol is “1AF” to “8AF” is set. In the temporary stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the same probability variable symbols as the non-probable variable symbol and the final stop symbol.

  The production control microcomputer 100 first determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1031 as the final stop symbol (probability variation symbol) using the final stop symbol table. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the temporary stop symbol table corresponding to the determined final stop symbol, and uses the temporary stop symbol (non-probable variable symbol or probable variable symbol) for the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1045. Design).

  Note that the middle symbol of the temporary stop symbol is automatically determined by the symbol difference specified by the variation pattern command. After the temporary stop symbol that is the reach failure symbol is displayed temporarily, the relief effect is executed, and the probability variation symbol that is the final stop symbol is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the first non-probable variable symbol determination process. Note that the first non-probable variable symbol determination process is a process executed when a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern of variation numbers 85 to 88 shown in FIG. 19 is received. The first non-probable variable symbol determination process (a process for determining the ornamental symbol to be derived and displayed as one of the non-probable variable symbols) is a normal big hit or a probable big hit (with re-drawing effect) in step S62, that is, FIG. 23 (C). This is executed when the “normal”, “probability variation 2”, and “probability variation 3” shown are determined.

  In the first non-probable variable symbol determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S1071). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the variation pattern has a single / double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S617). S1072). As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, only the normal reach is a single / double reach, and the super reach A and C is either a single reach or a double reach. If the variation pattern has a single / double common reach (Y in step S1072), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the common jackpot symbol selection table shown in FIG. 73 according to the random number extracted in step S1071. (F-1) is used to determine and store an uncertain variable symbol (step S1073). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1079.

  The common jackpot symbol selection table includes non-probable variation symbols (2UF, 2LF, 2CF, 2SF, 2AF, 4UF, 4LF, 4CF, 4SF, 4AF, 6UF, 6LF, 6CF, among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. 6SF, 6AF) are assigned a plurality of determination values. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1071 as the non-probable variation symbol.

  In step S1072, if it is not a fluctuation pattern with a single / double reach (N in step S1072), the production control microcomputer 100 receives the contents of the received fluctuation pattern command (the fluctuation pattern saved in step S617). Based on this, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (step S1074). If the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (Y in step S1074), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1071 to the single jackpot symbol selection table (F-7) shown in FIG. ) Is used to determine and store a non-probable variation symbol (step S1075). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1079.

  In the single jackpot symbol selection table, a plurality of judgment values are allocated to single reach non-probable variation symbols (2UF, 4UF, 6UF, 2LF, 4LF, 6LF, 2CF, 4CF, 6CF) among non-probability variation symbols. . The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1071 as the non-probable variation symbol.

  In step S1074, when the variation pattern is not accompanied by a single reach (N in step S1074), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation pattern is accompanied by a double reach. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 wins by the symbol that comes first in the double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617). It is determined whether or not the winning symbol is a winning symbol (step S1076). If it is a double tip (Y in step S1076), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1071 and displays a double tip jackpot symbol selection table (F-11) shown in FIG. Is used to determine and store a non-probable variable symbol (step S1077). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1079.

  In the double tip big hit symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to symbols (2SF, 4SF, 6SF) which are double tip among non-probability variable symbols. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1071 as the non-probable variation symbol.

  When it is a double hit (N in step S1076), the effect control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1071 and displays a double hit big hit symbol selection table (F-15) shown in FIG. Is used to determine and store a non-probable variation symbol (step S1078). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1079.

  In the double hit big hit symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to symbols (2AF, 4AF, 6AF) which are double after hits among non-probability variable symbols. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1071 as the non-probable variation symbol.

  In step S1079, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1079). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol using the super-development middle symbol selection table (F-6) shown in FIG. 78 according to the extracted random number value (step S1080). When normal reach is executed (Y in step S1072), the processes in steps S1079 and S1080 are not executed.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing sudden probability variation design determination processing. The sudden probability variation design determination process is a process executed when a variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of the variation number 91 shown in FIG. 19 is received.

  In the sudden probability variation design determination process, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S1081). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 suddenly determines and stores the probability variation symbol using the random symbol selection table (F-25) shown in FIG. 68 according to the extracted random number value (step S1082).

  In the accuracy symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are assigned substantially evenly to the sudden accuracy variation symbol (the chance item for accuracy) shown in FIG. The effect control microcomputer 100 suddenly determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the extracted random number value as the probability variation symbol.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the second decorative symbol determination process. In the second decorative symbol determination process, the production control microcomputer 100 first selects the normal jackpot designation command (8C01 (H)), the probability variation jackpot two designation command (8C03 (H)) or the received symbol information designation command. It is confirmed whether or not a 3 designation command (8C04 (H)) for probability variation is designated (step S671). When those contents are designated (Y of step S671), the production control microcomputer 100 indicates that the non-probable variation big hit has been determined (the big hit symbol at the time when the fluctuation is stopped is the non-probable variable symbol). An uncertain variable big hit determination flag is set (step S672). Then, a second uncertain variable symbol determination process is executed (step S673). The detailed contents of the second non-probable variable symbol determination process will be described later (see FIGS. 70 and 71).

  When the symbol information designation command is not the normal jackpot designation command or the probability variation big hit 2, 3 designation command (N in step S671), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether the probability variation big hit 1 designation command (8C02 (H)). Is confirmed (step S674). If it is a command specifying one of the probable variation jackpots (Y in step S674), the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the probable variation jackpot has been determined (the jackpot symbol at the time when the fluctuation is stopped is the probability variation symbol). Is set (step S675). Then, the second probability variation design determination process is executed (step S676).

  If the symbol information designation command is not a probability variation jackpot 1 designation command (N in step S674), the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not it is a sudden probability variation jackpot designation command (8C05 (H)) (step S677). . If it is a sudden probability change big hit designation command (Y in step S677), the production control microcomputer 100 sets a sudden probability change big hit determination flag indicating that the sudden probability change big hit has been determined (step S678). Then, a sudden probability variation design determination process is executed (step S679). Note that the sudden probability variation design determination process in step S675 is the same process (subroutine) as the process described in step S663 in FIG. 46 and FIG.

  When the symbol information designation command is not suddenly a probable big hit designation command (N in step S677), the symbol information designation command is a small hit designation command. If it is a small hit designation command, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a small hit determination flag indicating that the small hit is determined (step S680A). Then, a small hit symbol determination process is executed (step S680B). The detailed contents of the small hit symbol determination process will be described later (see FIG. 93).

  70 and 71 are flowcharts showing the second non-probable variable symbol determination process. The second non-probable variation symbol determination process receives a variation pattern command indicating variation patterns 62 to 84 (variation pattern for executing a re-lottery effect) shown in FIG. 19 and is normally used as a symbol information designation command. This process is executed when a big hit designation command (8C01 (H)) or a probable big hit 2,3 designation command (8C03 (H), 8C04 (H)) is received. The second non-probable variable symbol determination process (a process for determining the ornamental symbol to be derived and displayed as one of the non-probable variable symbols) is a normal big hit or a probable big hit (with re-drawing effect) in step S62, that is, FIG. 23 (C). This is executed when the “normal”, “probability variation 2”, and “probability variation 3” shown are determined.

  In the second non-probable variable symbol determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S1101). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the variation pattern has a single / double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S617). S1102). If the variation pattern has a single / double common reach (Y in step S1102), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the common jackpot symbol selection table shown in FIG. 73 according to the random number extracted in step S1101. (F-1) is used to determine and store an uncertain variable symbol (step S1103). Then, the process proceeds to step S1109. The re-lottery effect is executed during the fluctuation. In this embodiment, the temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery effect is executed is also derived and displayed after the re-lottery effect is executed. The final stop symbol is also the same non-probable variable determined in step S1103.

  In step S1102, if it is not a fluctuation pattern with a single / double common reach (N in step S1102), the production control microcomputer 100 receives the contents of the received fluctuation pattern command (the fluctuation pattern saved in step S617). Based on this, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (step S1104). If the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (Y in step S1104), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1101 to the single jackpot symbol selection table (F-7) shown in FIG. ) Is used to determine and store a non-probable variation (step S1105). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1109. The re-lottery effect is executed during the fluctuation. In this embodiment, the temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery effect is executed is also derived and displayed after the re-lottery effect is executed. The final stop symbol is also the same non-probable variable determined in step S1105.

  In step S1104, when the variation pattern is not accompanied by a single reach (N in step S1104), the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation pattern is accompanied by a double reach. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 wins by the symbol that comes first in the double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617). It is determined whether or not the winning symbol is a winning symbol (step S1106). If it is a double tip (Y in step S1106), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1101, and the double tip jackpot symbol selection table (F-11) shown in FIG. Is used to determine and store a non-probable variable symbol (step S1107). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1109. The re-lottery effect is executed during the fluctuation. In this embodiment, the temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery effect is executed is also derived and displayed after the re-lottery effect is executed. The final stop symbol is also the same non-probable variable determined in step S1107.

  If it is a double hit (N in step S1106), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1101, and the double hit jackpot symbol selection table (F-15) shown in FIG. Is used to determine and store a non-probable variable symbol (step S1108). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1109. The re-lottery effect is executed during the fluctuation. In this embodiment, the temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery effect is executed is also derived and displayed after the re-lottery effect is executed. The final stop symbol is also the same non-probable variable determined in step S1108.

  In step S1109, the effect control microcomputer 100 designates that the symbol information designation command executes the re-lottery effect after the big hit and promotes the non-probable variation symbol to the probability variation symbol, that is, the probability variation big hit two designation command (8C03). (H)) or whether the command is a probability variation big three designation command (8C04 (H)) (step S1109). If it is a symbol information designation command that designates promotion after a big hit (Y in step S1109), the production control microcomputer 100 sets a re-lottery effect execution flag indicating that a re-lottery effect is executed after the big win ( Step S1110). If it is a command with 2 probable big hits, a re-lottery effect execution flag is set to indicate that a re-lottery effect is to be executed during the big win. Set an ending re-lottery effect execution flag indicating that this is to be done. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores a probable variation symbol using the common jackpot symbol selection table (F-2) shown in FIG. 74 according to the random number value extracted in step S1101 (step S1111). The probability variation symbol determined in this way is a probability variation symbol derived and displayed in the re-lottery effect executed after the big hit game is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1112.

  In step S1112, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it is a variation pattern with a temporary stop of the chance eye B based on the content of the received variation pattern command (variation pattern saved in step S617) ( Step S1112). In this embodiment, when the chance eye B is displayed temporarily, the double reach super reach D is always developed.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance eye B (Y in step S1112), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (step S1113). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the chance eye B using the chance eye B selection table (F-20) corresponding to the jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 92 according to the extracted random number value (step S1114). ). For example, when the jackpot symbol determined in steps S1107 and S1108 is “1AF” or “8SF”, “41C”, “48C” and “48C” of chance eyes B (41C to 72C) as shown in FIG. The chance eye B is determined using a table in which determination values are assigned to 49C, 56C, 57C, 64C, 65C, and 72C. Then, the process ends.

  If the variation pattern is not accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance eye B (N in step S1112), the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1115). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol using the super-development middle symbol selection table (F-6) shown in FIG. 78 according to the extracted random number value (step S1116).

  The middle symbol determined in step S1116 is a middle symbol that is displayed when developing to super reach in the middle of a big hit, like the middle symbol determined in step S1044. As described above, since the middle symbol determined in step S1116 is displayed (temporary stop display) and then developed into super reach, there is a possibility that it will develop into super reach at any timing, and the interest of the game will not decline. Can be. In other words, if it is configured to develop into a super reach from a symbol with a fixed symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol (for example, a symbol that is one frame beyond the reach symbol), it can be predicted to some extent whether it will develop into a super reach. However, it is possible to develop to super reach at any timing by configuring so that the middle symbol determined in step S1116 (design of an indefinite symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol) is developed to super reach. The fun of gaming will not decline. However, you may make it always develop into a super reach from the design of the fixed symbol difference with respect to a reach design. For example, if a reach symbol is always developed from a symbol that is one or more frames or a symbol that is three or more frames to a super-reach, a big hit can be expected even if the medium symbol passes the constituent position of the big hit symbol. The reach symbols at this time are the left and right symbols (the left and right symbols of the non-probable variable symbol in the left middle right) constituting the non-probable variable symbols determined in steps S1105, S1107, and S1108.

  When the variation pattern has a reach that is common to both single and double (Y in step S1102), that is, when the variation pattern has a normal reach, the chance pattern A and the chance index B are stopped by the variation pattern command. Is not designated and does not develop into super reach (see FIGS. 18 and 19), it is not necessary to execute the processing of steps S1112 to S1119. Therefore, if the variation pattern is accompanied by normal reach, the process may be terminated without shifting to the process of step S1112 after the processes of steps S1109 to S1111 are executed.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it is a variation pattern with a temporary stop of the chance eye A based on the contents of the received variation pattern command (variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S617). S1117). When the chance eye A is temporarily stopped and displayed, in this embodiment, the chance eye A is temporarily stopped and displayed when the normal fluctuation is stopped, and then an effect of developing into super reach is executed.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance A (Y in step S1117), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (step S1118). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the chance eye A using the chance eye A selection table (F-19) corresponding to the jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 91 according to the extracted random number value (step S1119). ). For example, when the jackpot symbol determined in steps S1105, S1107, and S1108 is “2AF”, “1C”, “2C”, “9C”, “10C”, “17C”, “17C” among the chance points A (1C to 40C) A chance eye A is determined using a table (not shown in FIG. 91) in which determination values are assigned to 18C, 25C, 26C, 33C, and 34C. Thereafter, the process ends.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the second probability variation design determination process. The second probability variation symbol determination process receives a variation pattern command indicating variation patterns 62 to 84 (variation patterns for executing the re-lottery effect) shown in FIG. This process is executed when a 1 designation command (8C02 (H)) is received. The second probability variation design determination process (a processing for determining a certain probability variation symbol as a decorative symbol to be derived and displayed) is a probability variation big hit (no re-lottery effect) in step S62, that is, “probability variation 1” shown in FIG. It is executed when is determined.

  In the second probability variation symbol determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S1130). Then, a temporary stop symbol determining random number is extracted (step S1131). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the variation pattern has a single / double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S617). S1132). As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, only the normal reach is a single / double reach, and the super reach A to D is either a single reach or a double reach. If the variation pattern has a single / double common reach (Y in step S1132), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1130 and step S1131, and the common jackpot symbol shown in FIG. The temporary stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined and stored using the selection table (F-3) (step S1133). Thereafter, the process ends.

  Here, the “temporary stop symbol” refers to a non-probable variable symbol that is temporarily stopped before the fluctuating re-lottery effect is executed. In addition, the “final stop symbol” refers to a probability variation symbol that is derived and displayed after the re-drawing effect being changed is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the common jackpot symbol selection table includes a table for determining a final stop symbol (final stop symbol table) and a table for determining a temporary stop symbol (temporary stop symbol table). Is provided. In the final stop symbol table, the probability variation symbols (1UF, 3UF, 5UF, 7UF, 8UF, 1LF, 3LF, 5LF, 7LF, 8LF, 1CF, 3CF, 5CF, 7CF, 8CF, among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. (1SF, 3SF, 5SF, 7SF, 8SF, 1AF, 3AF, 5AF, 7AF, 8AF) are assigned a plurality of determination values. The temporary stop symbol table includes a table when the final stop symbol is “1UF” to “8UF”, a table when “1LF” to “8LF”, a table when “1CF” to “8CF”, The table is divided into a table for “1SF” to “8SF” and a table for “1AF” to “8AF”. In each table included in the temporary stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the non-probable variable symbols.

  First, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the final stop symbol table to determine the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1130 as the final stop symbol (probability variation symbol). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the temporary stop symbol table corresponding to the determined final stop symbol as the temporary stop symbol (non-probable variable symbol) for the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1131. decide.

  In step S1132, if it is not a variation pattern with a single / double common reach (N in step S1132), the production control microcomputer 100 receives the content of the variation pattern command received (variation pattern saved in step S617). Based on this, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (step S1134). If the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (Y in step S1134), the production control microcomputer 100 performs a single jackpot symbol selection table (shown in FIG. 81) according to the random number values extracted in steps S1130 and S1131 ( The temporary stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined and stored using F-9) (step S1135). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1139.

  As shown in FIG. 81, the single jackpot symbol selection table includes a table for determining the final stop symbol (final stop symbol table) and a table for determining the temporary stop symbol (temporary stop symbol table). Is provided. In the final stop symbol table, a probability variation symbol (1UF, 3UF, 5UF, 7UF, 8UF, 1LF, 3LF, 5LF, 7LF, 8LF, 1CF, 3CF, 5CF, which is a single reach among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. 7CF, 8CF) are assigned a plurality of determination values. The temporary stop symbol table is divided into a table when the final stop symbol is “1UF” to “8UF”, a table when “1LF” to “8LF”, and a table when “1CF” to “8CF”. It has been. In each table included in the temporary stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the non-probable variable symbols.

  First, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the final stop symbol table to determine the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1130 as the final stop symbol (probability variation symbol). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the temporary stop symbol table corresponding to the determined final stop symbol as the temporary stop symbol (non-probable variable symbol) for the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1131. decide.

  In step S1134, when the variation pattern is not a single reach (N in step S1134), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation pattern is a double reach. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 wins by the symbol that comes first in the double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617). It is determined whether or not the winning symbol is a winning symbol (step S1136). When it is a double front end (Y in step S1136), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random end values extracted in steps S1130 and S1131, and the double front end jackpot symbol selection table (F) shown in FIG. -13) is used to determine and store the temporary stop symbol and the final stop symbol (step S1137). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1139.

  As shown in FIG. 85, the table for selecting the big hit symbol for double tip is a table for determining the final stop symbol (final stop symbol table) and a table for determining the temporary stop symbol (temporary stop symbol table). And are provided. In the final stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the probability variation symbols (1SF, 3SF, 5SF, 7SF, 8SF) that are the double hits among the big hit symbols shown in FIG. As the temporary stop symbol table, only the table when the final stop symbol is “1SF” to “8SF” is set. In the temporary stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to non-probable variation symbols.

  First, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the final stop symbol table to determine the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1130 as the final stop symbol (probability variation symbol). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the temporary stop symbol table corresponding to the determined final stop symbol as the temporary stop symbol (non-probable variable symbol) for the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1131. decide.

  When it is a double winning hit (N in step S1136), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random winning value extracted in step S1130 and step S1131, and the double winning hit big hit symbol selection table (F -17) is used to determine and store the temporary stop symbol and the final stop symbol (step S1138). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1139.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the double rear hit big hit symbol selection table includes a table for determining the final stop symbol (final stop symbol table) and a table for determining the temporary stop symbol (temporary stop symbol table). And are provided. In the final stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the probability variation symbols (1AF, 3AF, 5AF, 7AF, 8AF) which are double hits among the big hit symbols shown in FIG. As the temporary stop symbol table, only the table when the final stop symbol is “1AF” to “8AF” is set. In the temporary stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to non-probable variation symbols.

  First, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the final stop symbol table to determine the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1130 as the final stop symbol (probability variation symbol). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the temporary stop symbol table corresponding to the determined final stop symbol, and uses the temporary stop symbol (non-probable variable symbol) as the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1031. decide.

  In step S1139, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it is a variation pattern with a temporary stop of the chance eye B based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S1139). Step S1139). In this embodiment, when the chance eye B is displayed temporarily, the double reach super reach D is always developed.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance eye B (Y in step S1139), the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (step S1140). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the chance eye B using the chance eye B selection table (F-20) corresponding to the jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 92 according to the extracted random number value (step S1141). ).

  If the variation pattern is not accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance eye B (N in step S1139), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1142). Then, in accordance with the extracted random number value, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol using the super development middle symbol selection table (F-6) shown in FIG. 78 (step S1143).

  The middle symbol determined in step S1143 is a middle symbol displayed when the game becomes a super reach in the middle of the big hit.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it is a variation pattern with a temporary stop of the chance eye A based on the contents of the received variation pattern command (variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S617). S1144). When the chance eye A is temporarily stopped and displayed, in this embodiment, the chance eye A is temporarily stopped and displayed when the normal fluctuation is stopped, and then an effect of developing into super reach is executed.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance eye A (Y in step S1144), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (step S1145). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the chance eye A using the chance eye A selection table (F-19) corresponding to the jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 91 according to the extracted random number value (step S1146). ). Then, the process ends.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the small hit symbol determination process. The small hit symbol determination process is performed when a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern of variation numbers 89 and 90 shown in FIG. 19 is received and a small hit designation command (8C06 (H)) is received as a symbol information designation command. It is a process to be executed.

  In the small hit symbol determining process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a big hit symbol determining random number (step S1161). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the small hit symbol using the small bonus symbol selection table (K-1) shown in FIG. 94 according to the extracted random number value (step S1162).

  In the small hit symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are allocated substantially evenly to the small hit symbols (small hit chance chances) shown in FIG. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the extracted random number value as the small hit symbol.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the temporary determination symbol determination process (step S632). In the temporary determination symbol determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S681). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether the variation pattern command is a variation pattern command for both a normal big hit / probability variation big hit or a sudden variation variation command for a sudden probability variation big hit / small hit (step S682).

  If the variation pattern command is a variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probability variation jackpots (Y in step S682), the production control microcomputer 100 uses the common jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 73 according to the random number extracted in step S681. Using the selection table (F-1), the uncertain variable symbol is tentatively determined and stored (step S683). On the other hand, if the variation pattern command is a variation pattern command for both sudden and promising large hits / small hits (N in step S682), the production control microcomputer 100 uses the small value shown in FIG. 94 according to the random number value extracted in step S681. A small winning symbol is temporarily determined and stored using the winning symbol selection table (K-1) (step S684).

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a command non-reception flag indicating that the symbol information designation command has not been received (step S685).

  In the above provisionally determined symbol determination process, the non-probable variable symbol is determined using the common jackpot symbol selection table shown in FIG. 73. However, the table for determining the non-probable variable symbol is variable. Based on the contents of the pattern command, the common jackpot symbol selection table shown in FIG. 73, the single jackpot symbol selection table shown in FIG. 79, the double hit jackpot symbol selection table shown in FIG. 83, and shown in FIG. You may make it use the jackpot symbol selection table for double rear hits properly. Further, in the above tentatively determined symbol determination process, the chance eye A and the chance eye using the chance eye A selection table (FIG. 91) and the chance eye B selection table (FIG. 92) according to the contents of the variation pattern command. A process of selecting and displaying B or determining and displaying a middle symbol during super-reach development using the super-development symbol selection table (FIG. 78) may be executed.

  FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the third probability variation design determination process (step S637). In the third probability variation symbol determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S691). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores a probable variation symbol using the common jackpot symbol selection table (F-2) shown in FIG. 74 according to the random number value (step S692). The probability variation symbol determined in this way is a probability variation symbol derived and displayed in the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game.

  FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S777) in the main process. In the effect control process, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs one of steps S800 to S808 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not an effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) specifying a fluctuation pattern has been received by the command reception interrupt process. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern reception flag indicating that a variation pattern command has been received is set. The variation pattern reception flag is set in step S618 in the command analysis process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Preliminary notice selection process (step S801): Control for selecting the effect mode of the notice effect (the notices A to D shown in FIG. 108) is executed. In this embodiment, the notice effect (notification effect) refers to an effect that informs the player in advance that the game will be a big hit or that possibility is high.

  Decoration symbol variation start processing (step S802): Control is performed so that the variation of the ornament symbol is started. In addition, a value corresponding to the variation time is set in the variation time timer, the process table to be used is selected, and the process timer setting value set at the beginning of the process table is set in the process timer.

  Decoration symbol variation processing (step S803): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When a predetermined notice effect is selected in the notice selection process, the predetermined notice effect is executed during the change of the decorative symbol.

  Decoration symbol variation stop processing (step S804): Control is performed to stop the variation of the ornament symbol and to derive and display the stop symbol (definite symbol) in response to the time-out of the variation time timer.

  Big hit display process (step S805): After the end of the variation time, the big hit display is controlled. For example, when a fanfare command designating the start of a big hit is received, a fanfare effect is executed. Also, when a fanfare command designating sudden start of a probable big hit is received, a two-round effect is executed.

  In-round processing (step S806): Display control during round is performed. For example, when a command for opening a special prize opening indicating that the special prize opening is being opened is received, display control of the number of rounds is performed. A re-lottery effect may be executed during a predetermined round. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the round in which the redrawing effect is executed is determined in advance (for example, 7 rounds or 15 rounds).

  Post-round processing (step S807): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a command after opening the big prize opening indicating that the big prize opening is after being opened (closed) is received, an interval display or the like is performed.

  Big hit end effect processing (step S808): Control of the big hit end display after the end of the big hit game is performed. For example, when an ending command specifying the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed. Note that a re-lottery effect may be executed during the ending effect.

  Small hit effect processing (step S809): When the fanfare command designating the start of the small hit is received after the end of the fluctuation time, the two round effect that is the effect during the small hit is executed.

  FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, each variation mode constituting the variation pattern is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the change mode. The effect control microcomputer 100 refers to the process table, and performs control for variably displaying the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  Similarly to the control based on the display control execution data, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the lighting state of various lamps based on the lamp control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and the sound number Data is output to the audio output board 70.

  The process data shown in FIG. 98 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. In addition, a process table is prepared for each variation pattern, and a process table with the same variation pattern is prepared for each effect mode of the notice effect. That is, the process table in the case where the process table having the same variation pattern does not execute the notice effect, the process table in the case of executing the notice effect in the form of the notice A, and the process in the case of executing the notice effect in the form of the notice B The process table is divided into a table, a process table for executing a notice effect in the form of the notice C, and a process table in a case of executing the notice effect in the form of the notice D.

  FIG. 99 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a register built in the VDP 109. The register shown in FIG. 99 is the drawing control register 95 in the VDP 109. The effect control CPU 101 can write data to the register by transmitting a command to the VDP 109 via the CPU I / F 92 and the CG bus.

  In the example shown in FIG. 99, the execution instruction register instructs the drawing control unit 91 to execute drawing on the VRAM 84 (instruction to expand source data such as characters set outside the drawing area of the VRAM 84 in the drawing area), data transfer To set instructions (instructions for transferring source data such as characters from the CGROM 83 to the outside of the drawing area of the VRAM 84) and decoding execution instructions (instructions for decoding the encoded movie data stored in the CGROM 83) Used. For example, 3 bits of the 8-bit execution instruction register are assigned to a drawing execution instruction, a data transfer instruction, and a decoding execution instruction, and when any of the bits becomes “1”, the drawing control unit 91 or the video decompression unit 89 performs the indicated operation.

  The drawing horizontal coordinate register and the drawing vertical coordinate register are used by the effect control CPU 101 to specify the upper left horizontal coordinate (X coordinate) and vertical coordinate (Y coordinate) of the drawing area in the VRAM 84. The horizontal size register and the vertical size register are used for designating the horizontal and vertical sizes of the drawing area.

  The CGROM address register is used for designating the start address of the storage area in the CGROM 83 for data such as characters transferred outside the drawing area of the VRAM 84.

  The VRAM horizontal coordinate register and the VRAM vertical coordinate register are used to specify the horizontal coordinate and the vertical coordinate (address of the fixed address area 155A in the VRAM 84) of the storage area in the VRAM 84 of the source data such as the character transferred from the CGROM 83. The VRAM horizontal size register and VRAM vertical size register are used to specify the horizontal size and vertical size of the storage area in the VRAM 84 of source data such as characters transferred from the CGROM 83.

  The video data transfer mode register is used for designating how the video data transferred from the CGROM 83 is expanded outside the drawing area of the VRAM 84 after being decoded. As the video data transfer mode, for example, a mode in which all frame images in a stream (a collection of frame images constituting a series of moving images) are developed in the VRAM 84, or a predetermined number (for example, three or four) of the streams are used. There is a mode in which the frame image is developed on the VRAM 84.

  The priority register displays which image data is preferentially displayed when the image data is drawn (expanded) in the drawing area in the VRAM 84 in a superimposed manner (so that the player can visually recognize the image data). This is used to specify whether to display on the near side.

  The display ON / OFF register is used for designating ON / OFF of display. When the set value of the display ON / OFF register is turned on, the drawing control unit 91 outputs the image signal based on the image data developed in the display area in the VRAM 84 to the variable display device 9. To instruct. The display area register is a register for designating which of the two display areas reserved in the VRAM 84 is to output the image signal based on the image data to the variable display device 9. The effect control CPU 101 sets data indicating one of the display areas in the display area register so that an image signal based on the current display area (at that time, the image data in the current display area is displayed on the variable display device 9. It is possible to determine which display area is the current display area according to the contents of the display area register.

  Although not shown in FIG. 99, there is also provided a register for designating the start address and the end address of the automatic transfer area 155B set in the storage area setting designation process (step S772).

  FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an address map in the VRAM. As shown in FIG. 100, in the address space of the VRAM 84, a frame buffer (also referred to as a drawing area or a display area) 156 in which image data displayed on the display screen of the variable display device 9 is drawn (expanded) is a predetermined area. The fixed address area 155A is secured in a predetermined area as a storage area for temporarily storing image data of frequently used component images transferred from the CGROM 83 and transferred from the CGROM 83. An automatic transfer area 155B is secured in a predetermined area as a storage area for temporarily storing image data.

  The image data of the component image that is frequently used is transferred from the CGROM 83 to the fixed address area 155A of the VRAM 84 and stored in advance based on the transfer instruction in step S773. That is, when the CPU 101 for effect control issues an instruction to transfer image data of a plurality of component images that are frequently used in the advance transfer command process (FIG. 97) in step S773, the address in the CGROM 83 storing the image data and The address of the fixed address area 155A in the VRAM 84 is designated. The VDP 109 sequentially reads out the image data at the address designated by the effect control CPU 101 from the CGROM 83, and stores the read image data at a predetermined address in the fixed address area 155A designated by the effect control CPU 101. Thereafter, when there is a drawing instruction (step S834B) of the image data of the component image that is frequently used from the effect control CPU 101, the VDP 109 does not read the image data of the component image from the CGROM 83, but in the fixed address area 155A. The image data stored at a predetermined address is developed at a predetermined position in the frame buffer 156 specified in the drawing instruction.

  The fixed address area 155A is divided at equal intervals, and the head address of the area divided at equal intervals is called a fixed address. Image data of each frequently used component image transferred from the CGROM 83 is stored in the fixed address area 155A with each fixed address as the head address.

  Also, image data of component images other than the component images that are frequently used (image data of component images that are not frequently used) is automatically transferred from the CGROM 83 to the VRAM 84 based on the drawing instruction in step S834B. It is transferred to 155B and stored. In other words, the effect control CPU 101 designates the address in the CGROM 83 in which the image data is stored and the address in the frame buffer 156 in the VRAM 84 when instructing to draw image data of a plurality of component images that are not frequently used in step S834B. To do. The VDP 109 sequentially reads out the image data at the address specified by the effect control CPU 101 from the CGROM 83, and stores the read image data at a predetermined address in the automatic transfer area 155B. Immediately, the VDP 109 expands the image data stored in the automatic transfer area 155B in the VRAM 84 to a predetermined position (predetermined address) in the frame buffer 156 specified in the drawing instruction.

  FIG. 101 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a method of expansion when a component image is expanded from the outside of the display area of the VRAM 84 to the display area. As shown in FIG. 101, the component image of the area specified by the original horizontal coordinate, the original vertical coordinate, the original horizontal size and the original vertical size in the VRAM 84 (stored in a predetermined address in the fixed address area 155A or the automatic transfer area 155B in the VRAM 84). The component image) is developed at a position specified by the development destination horizontal coordinate and the development destination vertical coordinate. The term “development” refers to writing image data at a designated position in the VRAM 84 and is also referred to as drawing. Further, expanding the component image from the display area (also referred to as a drawing area) of the VRAM 84 to the display area specifically means that the source data of the component image stored outside the display area of the VRAM 84 is converted to the display area. Is to write to. The source data is bitmap data, and the encoded part image data is also stored outside the display area of the VRAM 84 as the source data after being decoded.

  FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of how to use the VRAM. As shown in FIG. 102, two display areas (areas 0 and 1) corresponding to the screen of the variable display device 9 are secured in the VRAM 84. The areas 0 and 1 may be called display data storage means or a frame buffer. In areas 0 and 1, a background image (background image is also one of the component images) displayed on the variable display device 9 at a predetermined timing (for example, when the game machine is turned on or when variable display is started). .) Is developed. In addition, component images such as characters and identification information are developed in areas 0 and 1 as appropriate. When the component image is developed in the area 0, an image signal based on the image data of the area 1 is output to the variable display device 9, and when the component image is expanded in the area 1, the image based on the image data of the area 0 is output. A signal is output to the variable display device 9. When the component image is expanded in the area 0, the area 0 is a display area, and when the component image is expanded in the area 1, the area 1 is a display area. Further, when image data is read from the area 0 and an image signal based on the image data is output to the variable display device 9, the area 0 is a display area, and the image data is read from the area 1 and is included in the image data. When the original image signal is output to the variable display device 9, the area 1 is the display area. Thus, the areas 0 and 1 are used as a double buffer.

  In the area other than the areas 0 and 1 in the VRAM 84, as described above, a development area (fixed address area 155A) outside the display area of the VRAM 84 for component images is secured. From the CGROM 83 to the fixed address area 155A, a part image (specifically, source data of the part image) that is likely to be used at that time, that is, that is likely to be developed in the display area of the VRAM 84 is stored. .

  FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display example of a background image divided into a plurality of layers. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing an aspect of images displayed on a plurality of layers in the variable display device. As shown in FIG. 103, in this embodiment, the background image displayed on the display screen of the variable display device 9 is divided into a plurality of (four in this example) layers 1 to 4. Then, as shown in FIG. 104, the layers 1 to 4 constituting the background image, the layer N of the decorative design image, and the layer Y of the image of the notice screen are overlaid on the display area (drawing area) in the VRAM 84. Thus, an image of one screen is constructed and displayed on the display screen of the variable display device 9. In addition, since the image of the notice screen is not displayed when the notice effect is not executed, in this case, by superimposing the layers 1 to 4 constituting the background image and the layer N of the decorative design image, One screen image is constructed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 103, an image of a distant star is displayed on Layer 4, a Saturn image is displayed on Layer 3, a Jupiter image is displayed on Layer 2, and a nearby star ( For example, Earth) is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the layer N displays three frames of decorative symbols that are continuous in the display areas of the left, middle, and right columns. As shown in FIG. 108, a notice screen (a screen for displaying the contents of the conversation spoken by the character) is displayed on layer Y.

  In this embodiment, the priority of the image data is the highest in the image data of the notice screen of layer Y, and then the image data of the decorative pattern of layer N, the image data of the stars near layer 1, and the Jupiter of layer 2 In this order, image data of Saturn in layer 3, and image data of distant stars in layer 4. An image of a higher priority layer is displayed in the foreground, and an image of a lower priority layer is displayed in the rear. In this embodiment, the priority of the image data is set in the priority register by transmitting a command from the effect control CPU 101 to the VDP 109.

  In this embodiment, the decorative image of layer N is variably displayed (that is, vertically scrolled) in the vertical direction (in this embodiment, from top to bottom) in the left, middle, and right columns of display areas. It is configured as follows. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the background image is configured so as to be variably displayed in the direction opposite to the direction in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed (in this embodiment, from bottom to top).

  Specifically, when the decorative pattern is not variably displayed, only the background image of the distant star in the layer 4 is slowly variably displayed in the direction opposite to the direction of the decorative pattern variably displayed. . Further, when the variable display of the decorative design is performed, the background image composed of the layers 1 to 4 is variably displayed in the direction opposite to the direction of the variable display of the decorative design. At this time, during normal variation (high-speed variation) of the decorative pattern, the star image closest to the near side displayed on layer 1 is variably displayed at the maximum velocity (fastest velocity). Also, the next Jupiter image displayed on Layer 2 is displayed in a variable manner at a slower speed than the image of a nearby star. Further, the next Saturn image on the near side displayed on the layer 3 is variably displayed at a slower speed than the Jupiter image. In addition, the image of the far-side star displayed on the layer 4 is displayed at a slower speed than the image of Saturn (for example, the same speed as when the decorative pattern variation is stopped). Furthermore, the background images of layer 1 to layer 3 are stopped and displayed along with the stop of the variable display of decorative symbols.

  In this way, the background image is displayed variably in the direction opposite to the direction in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed, and the background image is variably displayed at a different speed depending on the part, thereby enabling the variable display of the decorative pattern. In addition to being innovative, a sense of perspective is added to the variably displayed background image, and the reality is further increased.

  In each layer, if a portion other than the star image (Saturn image, Jupiter image, nearby star image) is made transparent, distant stars can be displayed over the entire screen.

  As you scroll through the images in each layer, the end of the image is reached, but the image in each layer is moved to the initial position (the first position of scrolling) before reaching the end of the image so that the image is not interrupted. ) Is also performed.

  FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S811). If it has been set, the flag is reset (step S812). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the variation pattern of the decorative design based on the contents (variation number, variation time) designated by the variation pattern command (step S813). Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the notice selection process (step S801) (step S814).

  In this embodiment, the background image (distant star image) is scrolled (variable display) even when the decorative symbol variable display is not executed. In addition, display update command processing (processing in step S834B described later) is executed to update the display of the background image.

  In general, when the variable display of decorative symbols is not performed for a predetermined period, the display screen of the variable display device 9 is switched to a demonstration screen (demonstration screen). You may do it. In this case, timer measurement is started when the decorative symbol variable display is completed, and control is performed to display a demo screen when a variation pattern command is not received for a predetermined period. Even during the display of the demonstration screen, the display update command process (the process of step S834B described later) is executed to update the display of the background image.

  FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the advance notice selection process (step S801) in the effect control process. In the notice selection process, the production control microcomputer 100 first extracts a notice selection random number (step S815). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a notice selection table corresponding to the variation pattern (step S816).

  FIG. 107 shows an example of the notice selection table. The notice selection table includes a table for a variation pattern without reach (a variation pattern without reach), a table for a variation pattern with normal reach, a table for a variation pattern with super reach A, a super A table for a variation pattern with reach B, a table for a variation pattern with super reach C, and a table for a variation pattern with super reach D are provided.

  In each notice selection table, “no notice” indicates that no notice effect is executed. “Notice A” is a mode of a notice effect that is least likely to generate a jackpot, and “Notice B” is a mode of a notice effect that is more likely to be a jackpot than “Notice A”. "Is a mode of a notice effect that is more likely to generate a jackpot than" Notice B ", and" Notice D "is a mode of a notice effect that is most likely to be a jackpot.

  In the notice selection table shown in FIG. 107, “no notice” is always selected when the variation pattern does not involve reach. That is, in this embodiment, the notice effect is not executed in the case of a variation pattern that does not involve reach. Note that a notice effect in a predetermined mode may be executed even when the variation pattern does not involve reach. In the table for the fluctuation pattern with normal reach, no judgment value is assigned to “notice D”. Therefore, for the fluctuation pattern with normal reach, “notice D” is not selected. Further, in the case of a fluctuation pattern with super reach D, the ratio of “no notice” being selected is the lowest. Therefore, the notice effect is executed with a high probability.

  FIG. 108 shows an example of the effect form of the notice effect. As shown in FIG. 108, different characters (in this example, human characters) are associated with the numbers “1”, “2”, “3”,.

  The effect of “notice A” is that the left symbol (in this example, “1” in the upper row) is stopped and displayed, and the right symbol (in this example, “1” in the upper row) is stopped and displayed. When the middle symbol (“2” in the middle row in this example) is temporarily stopped and the character of the left symbol “1” silences “...”, The character of the middle symbol “2” becomes “. It is a mode of silence. This mode of announcement effect is the least likely to generate a big hit.

  The effect of “notice B” is that the left symbol (in this example, “1” in the upper row) is stopped and displayed, and the right symbol (in this example, “1” in the upper row) is stopped and displayed. When the middle symbol (in this example, “2” in the middle row) is temporarily stopped and the character of the left symbol “1” speaks “chance”, the character of the middle symbol “2” silences “...”. It is an aspect. This notice effect mode is more likely to generate a big hit than the “Notice A” effect mode.

  The effect of “notice C” is that the left symbol (in this example, “1” in the upper row) is stopped and displayed, and the right symbol (in this example, “1” in the upper row) is stopped and displayed. When the middle symbol (in this example, “2” in the middle row) is temporarily stopped and the left symbol “1” character says “chance”, the middle symbol “2” character answers “OK!”. is there. This notice effect mode is more likely to generate a big hit than the “Notice B” effect mode.

  The effect of “notice D” is that the left symbol (in this example, “1” in the upper row) is stopped and displayed, and the right symbol (in this example, “1” in the upper row) is stopped and displayed. When the middle symbol (in this example, “2” in the middle row) is temporarily stopped and the character of the left symbol “1” speaks “Large Chance”, the character of the middle symbol “2” answers “I will!” It is an aspect. This notification effect mode is most likely to generate a big hit.

  After the effects of the above notices A to D are executed, the change corresponding to the change pattern is executed. For example, normal reach variation is executed without developing to super reach, or super reach A to D is performed by developing to super reach.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to execute the notice effect using the notice selection table selected in step S816 and the effect form of the notice effect when the notice effect is executed (step S817). ). That is, either “No notice” or “Notice A” to “Notice D” associated with the determination value that matches the value of the random number for selecting notice is selected. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects and stores the notice effect of the character according to the already determined stop symbol (here, the reach symbol or the jackpot symbol) (step S818).

  That is, when it is determined to be “displacement” (for example, when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a variation pattern for separation, or when the variation is designated by the symbol information designation command). Then, the notice announcement effect of the character corresponding to the already determined reach design is selected. Specifically, if the already determined reach symbol is the symbol “1” in the upper row (1 UH shown in FIG. 3), the character of the left symbol that starts the conversation first is associated with symbol “1”. 108, the middle symbol character responding to the conversation is the character associated with the symbol “2” next to the symbol “1”, and the notice effect using these characters is shown in FIG. This is selected as a notice effect to be executed when such reach is established.

  In addition, when it is determined to be “big hit” (for example, when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern for big hit (excluding suddenly probable big hit), (When suddenly odd jackpot is excluded) is selected, the notice effect of the character corresponding to the jackpot symbol already determined is selected. Specifically, if the already determined jackpot symbol is the symbol “1” in the upper row (1UF shown in FIG. 4), the character in the left symbol that starts the conversation first is associated with symbol “1”. 108, the middle symbol character responding to the conversation is the character associated with the symbol “2” next to the symbol “1”, and the notice effect using these characters is shown in FIG. This is selected as a notice effect to be executed when such reach is established.

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value indicating the decorative symbol variation start process (step S802) (step S819).

  In the above example, the notice effect is executed only when reach is achieved (in the case of a fluctuation pattern with reach). However, the notice effect is also executed when reach is not established. Good. For example, in the notice selection table when there is no reach shown in FIG. 107, a determination value may be assigned to notice A, notice B, or the like. In this case, since it is necessary to execute a notice effect before reach is reached in the variation of the decorative symbol, the character associated with the left symbol (for example, the upper symbol or the middle symbol) that has already been determined is first conversed. The character of the left symbol to be started and the character associated with the symbol of the next number after the left symbol (for example, “4” if the left symbol is “3”) are the characters of the middle symbol that responds to the conversation. Then, after temporarily stopping the left symbol and temporarily stopping the middle symbol, a notice effect is performed in which the character of the left symbol and the character of the middle symbol have a conversation, and then the decorative symbol is changed again.

  In addition, the conversation character is a character associated with the left symbol and the middle symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to such a case. The associated character may be allowed to converse, or the character associated with the left symbol and the character associated with the right symbol may be allowed to converse.

  In addition, the above notice effect is an effect that causes the character associated with the symbol to converse, but if it is an effect that allows the player to recognize that it is a big hit or that possibility, it may be an effect of a different aspect Good. For example, it may be an effect in which a character associated with a reach symbol or a jackpot symbol sings (speaks) alone.

  Further, in the notice selection process shown in FIG. 106, the notice notice effect of the character is selected according to the already-decorated stop pattern of the decorative design (reach design or jackpot design that has already been determined) (step S818). However, it may be configured such that a notice effect of a predetermined character is selected first, and a symbol associated with the selected character is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) when the notice effect is executed. For example, when the character associated with the symbol “1” and the character associated with “2” are selected first as the characters used for the announcement effect, the symbol “1” is left when the announcement effect is executed. Is temporarily stopped in the display area, and the symbol “2” is temporarily stopped in the middle display area. Then, the character with the left symbol “1” starts a conversation, and the character with the middle symbol “2” responds to the conversation. After that, after changing the left middle right symbol again, the fluctuation according to the fluctuation pattern is executed. For example, normal reach variation is executed without developing to super reach, or super reach A to D is performed by developing to super reach. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to execute a notice effect using a character associated with a symbol.

  FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation start processing, the effect control microcomputer 100 first selects a process pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be used or the mode of the preliminary announcement effect when executing the preliminary announcement effect (step S821). . Then, the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the selected process table is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S822).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 starts a variation time timer (a timer according to the variation time of the decorative design) (step S823), and indicates the value of the production control process flag during the decorative design variation processing (step S803). The value is updated (step S824).

  FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation processing, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the variation time timer has timed out (step S831). If the variation time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value indicating the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S804) (step S838).

  If the variation time timer has not timed out, the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the process timer by 1 (step S832) and decrements the variation time timer by 1 (step S833). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 loads the content of the process data (lamp control execution data, sound number data), and the production device (various lamps, speakers 27) excluding the variable display device 9 according to the content of the process data. Control is executed (step S834A). For example, a control signal is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform lighting / extinguishing control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 loads the contents of the display control execution data set in the process table, and executes predetermined display update command processing according to the contents of the display control execution data (step S834B). The contents of the display update command process will be described later (see FIG. 111).

  The effect control CPU 101 (effect control microcomputer 100) confirms the input of the V blank interrupt signal from the VDP 109. The V blank outputs image data expanded in the frame buffer (display area) of the VRAM 84 to the variable display device 9 and then outputs the image data expanded next to the frame buffer of the VRAM 84 to the variable display device 9. The period until the beginning. The VDP 109 outputs an interrupt signal to the effect control CPU 101 at the start of the V blank to generate a V blank interrupt. As described above, the V blank interrupt is an interrupt generated by the VDP 109 in the same cycle as the cycle of the vertical synchronization signal supplied to the variable display device 9. For example, when the screen change frequency (frame frequency) of the variable display device 9 is 30 Hz, the generation period of the V blank interrupt is 33.3 ms, and when the frame frequency is 60 Hz, the occurrence of the V blank interrupt is generated. The period is 16.7 ms. The effect control CPU 101 includes an interrupt terminal (INT terminal) for receiving an interrupt signal from the VDP 109. When the input level of the interrupt terminal falls to a low level, the effect control CPU 101 detects the occurrence of a V blank interrupt as an external interrupt. Then, when the production control CPU 101 detects the occurrence of the V blank interrupt, it executes a V blank interrupt process (not shown).

  In this embodiment, in the display update command process described later, the effect control CPU 101 creates and sets a command for instructing (commanding) image data transfer or the like to the VDP 109, and in the V blank interrupt process, for effect control. The CPU 101 is configured to output the set command to the VDP 109. However, in the display update command processing, the production control CPU 101 creates a command and when the image display update timing based on the V blank interruption comes (for example, whether or not the image display update timing has come) This is done by checking a flag that is set when there is an interrupt), and the created command may be sent to the VDP 109.

  It should be noted that the production control device 100 (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) of the production device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the content of the process data for the production control microcomputer 100 to execute the re-lottery production By executing the control (steps S834A, S834B), the re-drawing effect that is changing is executed. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the content of the process data (process data including the notice effect) for executing the notice effect. By executing (steps S834A, S834B), the notice effect is executed during the fluctuation. Further, when the production control microcomputer 100 executes control of the variable display device 9 in accordance with the contents of the display control execution data (step S834B), the direction of variable display of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol Control for variably displaying the background image in the reverse direction is executed. At this time, the layer 1 image fluctuates at a high speed, the layer 2 image fluctuates at a slower speed than the layer 1 image, the layer 3 image fluctuates at a slower speed than the layer 2 image, Images vary slowly.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S835). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step S836). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S837).

  FIG. 111 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the display update command process executed in step S834B. In the display update command process, the production control CPU 101 first specifies a part image whose display is to be updated from, for example, display control execution data of the currently selected process data (step S741). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the component image identified in step S741 is a component image for which image data is to be transferred in advance to the fixed address area 155A of the VRAM 84 (step S742).

  If it is determined in step S742 that the image is a part image to be pre-transferred (Y in step S742), the image data is read from the fixed address area 155A of the VRAM 84 from, for example, process data display control execution data. An address is specified (step S743). Further, for example, the writing address of the image data in the frame buffer 156 corresponding to the display position (display coordinates) of the component image is specified from the display control execution data of the process data (step S744). Further, the amount of image data indicating the component image to be updated is specified (step S745). Thereafter, based on the read address in the fixed address area 155A identified in steps S743 to S745, the write address in the frame buffer 156, and the data amount of the image data, a fixed address designation display command is created and transmitted to the VDP 109 (step S746). ).

  If it is determined in step S742 that the image is not a part image to be pre-transferred (N in step S742), the image data read address in the CGROM 83 is specified from, for example, process data display control execution data (step S742). Step S747). Further, for example, the writing address of the image data in the frame buffer 156 corresponding to the display position (display coordinates) of the component image is specified from the display control execution data of the process data (step S748). Furthermore, the data amount of image data indicating the component image to be updated is specified (step S749). Thereafter, an automatic transfer display command is created and transmitted to the VDP 109 based on the read address in the CGROM 83 specified in steps S747 to S749, the write address in the frame buffer 156, and the data amount of the image data (step S750).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the command for all the update target component images has been completed (step S751). If the command is not completed (N in step S751), the process returns to step S741. On the other hand, if the command for all the part images to be updated is completed (Y in step S751), the display update command process is terminated.

  The VDP 109 performs a process of setting data in a register provided in the drawing control unit 91 based on a command (such as a fixed address designation display command or an automatic transfer display command) from the effect control CPU 101. Specifically, the storage address (read address) of the image data of the component image in the CGROM 83 is set in the CGROM address register, and the VRAM 84 is set in the VRAM horizontal coordinate register, VRAM vertical coordinate register, VRAM horizontal size register, and VRAM vertical size register. The information regarding the transfer destination of the source data of the component image is set, and information indicating the data transfer (in the case of a sprite image) or the decoding execution instruction (in the case of movie data) is set in the execution instruction register.

  Also, the VDP 109 sets the top address of the information storage area indicating the part image in the part image information top address register, and the horizontal coordinates in the upper left and the vertical coordinates in the upper left of the drawing area in the drawing horizontal coordinate register and the drawing vertical coordinate register. Information indicating the horizontal size and vertical size of the drawing area is set in the horizontal size register and the vertical size register, and information indicating the drawing instruction to the frame buffer 156 is set in the execution instruction register. Set.

  When the drawing control unit 91 in the VDP 109 recognizes that the information indicating data transfer is set in the execution instruction register, the image data (image data of a part image that is not frequently used) is generated from the address of the CGROM 83 set in the CGROM address register. ), And the read image data is stored in a predetermined address of the automatic transfer area 155B of the VRAM 84 specified by the information set in the VRAM horizontal coordinate register, VRAM vertical coordinate register, VRAM horizontal size register, and VRAM vertical size register. To do.

  When the drawing control unit 91 in the VDP 109 recognizes that the information indicating the drawing instruction is set in the execution instruction register, it draws (decompresses) the image data stored in the area other than the frame buffer in the VRAM 84 in the frame buffer. To do.

  In this embodiment, a command is transmitted to the VDP 109 based on the display control execution data in the process data in the decorative symbol variation processing (step S1803), and the data is stored in the register provided in the drawing control unit 91 of the VDP 109. It is configured to be set. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. In the process based on the V blank interrupt (V blank interrupt process), a command is transmitted to the VDP 109 based on the display control execution data in the process data, and the drawing control unit of the VDP 109 Data may be set in a register provided in 91.

  FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation stop process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation stop process, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not an effect control command (decorative symbol stop designation command) for instructing the decorative symbol variation stop is received (step S841). If the decorative symbol stop designation command has been received, control is performed to stop and display the decorative symbol stop symbol stored in the command analysis process (step S842).

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control to stop and display the decorative symbols in response to the reception of the decorative symbol stop designation command from the game control microcomputer 560. The present invention is not limited to this, and control for stopping and displaying decorative symbols may be performed based on the time-up of the variable time timer.

  When the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in step S842 is a small hit symbol (Y in step S843), the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the small hit fanfare reception flag is set. (Step S844). When the small hitting fanfare reception flag is set (Y in step S844), the production control microcomputer 100 executes the contents of the stored fanfare command and the contents of the stored variation pattern (the time mission entry effect is executed). Based on whether or not a sudden probability change / small hit common rush effect was executed) for two rounds (two rounds corresponding to the time mission rush effect, sudden rounds / small hit common rush effect) (Production) is selected (step S845). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects process data corresponding to the selected effect for the two rounds (step S846). Then, the process timer is started (step S847), and the 2R effect time timer for measuring the execution time of the 2-round effect is started (step S848). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit effect process (step S809) (step S849).

  When the stop symbol of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in step S842 is not a big hit symbol but a big hit symbol (non-probable variation symbol, probability variation symbol, sudden probability variation symbol) (Y in step S850), the production control microcomputer 100 uses Then, it is confirmed whether or not the fanfare reception flag is set (step S851). When the fanfare reception flag is set (Y in step S851), the effect control microcomputer 100 causes the contents of the stored fanfare command and the contents of the stored variation pattern (whether the time mission entry effect has been executed or suddenly changed). Based on whether or not the rush production was executed, the fanfare production (the production of the cue indicating that the 15-round jackpot game will start) or the production for 2 rounds (the production for 2 rounds corresponding to the time mission rush production, sudden sudden change One of the two-round effects corresponding to the rush effect is selected (step S852). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects process data corresponding to the selected fanfare effect or two-round effect (step S853). Then, the process timer is started (step S854), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S805) (step S855).

  If the stop symbol of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in step S850 is not a jackpot symbol (non-probable variation symbol, probability variation symbol, or sudden probability variation symbol), that is, if it is an outlier symbol (N in step S850), the effect control microcomputer 100 resets a predetermined flag (step S856). For example, when a flag corresponding to the decorative symbol stop designation command is set, such a flag is reset. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S857).

  FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode during decoration pattern change. As shown in FIG. 113, variable display of decorative symbols is performed from top to bottom. At this time, the background image is variably displayed in the direction opposite to the direction of variable display of the decorative design, that is, from the bottom to the top. As the fluctuation speed of the background image, an image of a star near the left side is variably displayed at a high speed. Also, the Jupiter image second from the left is variably displayed at a slower speed than the image of nearby stars. Also, the third Saturn image from the left is displayed variably at a slower speed than the Jupiter image. Also, the far star image on the right is displayed at a slower speed than the Saturn image. In this embodiment, only the image of a distant star is variably displayed even when the decorative symbol is not variably displayed, so the nearby star image, Jupiter image, and Saturn image are variable in the decorative symbol. When the display is stopped, the display is stopped. A distant star image may also be stopped and displayed along with the stop of variable display of decorative symbols. In addition, similar to the image of a distant star, the image of a nearby star, the image of Jupiter, and the image of Saturn may be variably displayed even when the decorative symbol is not variably displayed.

  In this embodiment, the decorative pattern image has higher priority than the nearby star image, Jupiter image, Saturn image, and distant star image, so the decorative pattern image is displayed in the foreground. Yes.

  FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram showing scrolling of nearby star images. As shown in FIG. 114, the image of the nearby star is initially at the lower position, but when scrolling upward (moving display) from this position, the image of the nearby star reaches the upper position. , And then gradually hide to the top of the screen and disappear completely. At this timing, the image of the nearby star is returned to the initial position (the first position of scrolling, specifically, the invisible position at the bottom of the screen). Then, similar to the above, the image of a nearby star is scrolled upward. Then, the image of nearby stars gradually appears from the bottom of the screen. By repeating such processing, it is possible to continue scrolling of nearby star images. This configuration is the same for other images (images of Jupiter, images of Saturn, images of distant stars).

  FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S805) in the effect control process. In the big hit display process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open command has been received is set (step S901). The special winning opening open flag is set in the command analysis process (see step S645). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in step S901), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S902), and the production device (in accordance with the contents of the process data n) Control of the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S903). For example, in the case of 15 rounds of big hit, the variable display device 9 displays a big hit display symbol and executes an effect of displaying characters or characters indicating that a big hit has occurred. Further, for example, in the effect for two rounds, an effect for displaying special characters or characters is executed.

  In addition, as a process of executing control of the variable display device 9 according to the content of the display control execution data in step S903, the display update command process having the same content as that in step S834B of the decorative symbol variation process is executed. The same applies to steps S923, S943, S972, and S982.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S905). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S906).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S901), the production control microcomputer 100 produces an in-round production (the number of rounds) based on the contents of the big prize opening open command for 15 rounds. An effect for executing the corresponding round display is selected (step S907). When a command for opening a special prize opening for 2 rounds is received, there is no need to newly select a production since the production for 2 rounds is continuously executed during the round, but 2 for each round. When switching the effect included in the performance for round (for example, when switching the display screen of the effect for two rounds), the effect included in the effect for two rounds may be newly selected for each round. . Next, the special winning opening open flag is reset (step S908), and a process table corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (step S909). Then, the process timer is started (step S910), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the mid-round process (step S806) (step S911).

  FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing mid-round processing (step S806) in the effect control process. In the in-round processing, first, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not a flag after opening the big prize opening indicating that a command after opening the special prize opening has been received is set (step S921). Note that the flag after opening the special winning opening is set in the command analysis process (see step S645). When the flag for opening the big prize opening is not set (N in step S921), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S922), and the production device (in accordance with the contents of the process data n) Control of the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S923). For example, the variable display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and executes an effect of displaying characters indicating the number of rounds, other characters, and the like. Moreover, in the effect for two rounds, the effect which displays a special character, a character, etc. is performed. When a re-lottery effect is to be executed during the big hit game (when the big lottery re-draw lottery execution flag is set), a predetermined round (for example, 7 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.) A re-lottery effect is executed.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S924), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S925). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S926).

  When the flag after opening the big prize opening is set in step S921 (Y in step S921), the production control microcomputer 100 performs interval production (according to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the command after opening the big prize opening. An effect for performing interval display is selected (step S927). In addition, when the command after opening the grand prize opening for 2 rounds is received, there is no need to newly select an effect since the effect for 2 rounds is continuously executed after the round, but 2 rounds after the round. When switching the effect included in the effect for the second time (for example, when switching the display screen of the effect for two rounds), the effect included in the effect for the second round may be newly selected after the round. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the flag after opening the special winning opening (step S928), and selects a process table corresponding to the selected interval effect (step S929). Then, the process timer is started (step S930), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the round post-processing (step S807) (step S931).

  117 and 118 are flowcharts showing the round post-processing (step S807) in the effect control process. In the round post-processing, the effect control microcomputer 100 first checks whether the ending flag is set (step S940). When the ending flag is not set (N in step S940), the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open command has been received is set. Confirmation is made (step S941). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in step S941), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S942), and the production device (in accordance with the contents of the process data n) Control of the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S943).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S944), and switches the process data if the process timer has timed out (step S945). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S946).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S941), the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether it is necessary to execute the re-lottery production during the big hit (during the round) ( Step S947). Specifically, a big lottery re-lottery execution flag (a flag indicating that a re-lottery effect is determined to be executed during a big hit based on a fanfare command when the symbol information designation command is not received; S642) When an effect execution flag (a flag indicating that it is determined that the re-lottery effect is to be executed during the big hit based on the symbol information designation command; S625C) is set (when the re-lottery effect is further executed, it is a predetermined round. When), it is determined that it is necessary to execute the re-lottery effect during the big hit. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the re-lottery effect is executed in the same predetermined round (for example, the seventh round) when the symbol information designation command is missed or not missed. It may be executed in different rounds. For example, if a symbol information designation command is missed, a re-lottery effect is executed in the fifth round, and if a symbol information designation command is not missed, a re-lottery effect is executed in the seventh round.

  When it is determined that it is necessary to execute the re-lottery effect during the big hit (Y in step S947), the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the effect during the round in which the re-lottery effect is executed (step S948). Then, a re-lottery execution completion flag is set (step S949). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not necessary to execute the re-lottery effect during the big hit (N in Step S947), the mid-round effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect is selected (Step S950).

  Next, the special winning opening open flag is reset (step S951), and a process table corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (step S952). Then, the process timer is started (step S953), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S806) (step S954).

  When the ending reception flag is set in step S940 (Y in step S940), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a re-lottery effect needs to be executed during the ending effect (step S955). Specifically, when the ending re-lottery execution flag or the ending re-lottery execution execution flag is set, and even if the big hit mid-relot lottery execution flag or the big hit mid-relottery execution execution flag is set, If the re-lottery executed flag indicating that the lottery effect has been executed during the big hit (during the round) is not set (see step S949), it is determined that the re-lottery effect needs to be executed during the ending effect.

  If it is determined that the re-lottery effect needs to be executed during the ending effect (Y in step S955), the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the ending effect for executing the re-lottery effect (step S956). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not necessary to execute the re-lottery effect during the ending effect, for example, when the re-lottery executed flag is set (N in step S955), the ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect is selected. (Step S957).

  Here, the execution time of the ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect is made shorter than the execution time of the ending effect that executes the re-lottery effect. For example, the execution time of the ending effect that executes the re-lottery effect is 10 seconds, and the execution time of the ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect is 3 seconds. By setting in this way, it is possible to avoid that the effect is unnecessarily executed for a long time when it is not necessary to notify the transition to the probability changing state.

  When selecting an ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect in step S957, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit with a flag (probable big hit decision flag, normal big hit decision flag). Choose different ending effects depending on whether you are a big hit or a normal big hit. For example, in the case of a probable big hit, an effect that informs the player that the game will change to a probable state after the big hit is over (instead of notifying that the player is promoted from a non-probable variable symbol to a probable symbol like the re-lottery effect, Select an ending effect that executes an effect that informs the transition to a probabilistic state based on the normal), and in the case of a big hit, select an ending effect that executes an effect that informs the player that it will shift to the short state after the big hit To do.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the ending reception flag (step S958), and selects a process table corresponding to the ending effect (step S959). Then, the process timer is started (step S960), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect process (step S808) (step S961).

  FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S808) in the effect control process. In the big hit end effect process, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S971), and controls the effect device (variable display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n. Execute (Step S972). For example, when the end of the big hit is displayed, or when a re-lottery effect is included in the ending effect, the re-lottery effect is executed.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S973), and if the process timer has timed out, a predetermined flag (probability big hit decision flag, normal big hit decision flag, Suddenly probable big hit decision flag, big hit re-lottery execution flag, ending re-lottery execution flag, etc.) are reset (step S974), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800). Setting is made (step S975).

  FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the small hit effect process (step S809) in the effect control process. In the small hit effect process, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S981), and controls the effect device (variable display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n. Execute (step S982). Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the 2R effect time timer (step S983).

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the 2R production time timer has timed out (step S984). If not timed out, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S985). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step S986). . Then, the process timer is started (step S987).

  If the 2R effect time timer has timed out (Y in step S984), the effect control microcomputer 100 resets a predetermined flag (such as a small hit flag) (step S988), and sets the value of the effect control process flag. A value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) is set (step S989).

  Next, an effect mode of the re-lottery effect of the jackpot symbol executed in the variable display device 9 will be described. FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of a jackpot symbol re-lottering effect executed in the variable display device. The display effect as illustrated in FIG. 121 is executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the effect control command sent from the game control microcomputer 560. In addition, the display example in FIG. 121 shows a case where the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending effect.

  In this embodiment, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives a variation pattern command other than the variation pattern command for both normal big hit / probability big hit and sudden variation for big hit / small hit (step S619). N, N in S620) Based on the received variation pattern command, the discrepancy, jackpot, and jackpot type are determined, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined in accordance with that (step S621, FIG. 46). On the other hand, when a variation pattern command for both normal big hit / probability big hit or sudden variation for big hit / small hit is received (Y in step S619, Y in S620), it is based on the symbol information designation command received thereafter. Then, it is determined whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit, and a stop symbol of the decorative design corresponding to that is determined (step S626, FIG. 69).

  However, even if the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command for both normal big hit / probability big hit or sudden variation for both big probability / small hit, the symbol information designation command may be missed. is there. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 cannot determine whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit, or cannot suddenly judge whether it is a probable big hit or a small hit, and determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. It will be impossible. Therefore, if the symbol information designation command is missed even though the variation pattern command for both normal big hit / probable big hit or sudden variation for big hit / small hit has been received (Y in step S629, S630). N of S631, N of S631), the stop symbol (temporarily determined symbol) of the decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped is temporarily determined (step S632, FIG. 95). The provisionally determined symbol is a non-probable variation symbol when a normal big hit / probable variation jackpot variation pattern command is received, and a sudden hit symbol when a variation pattern command is suddenly received. It is a design.

  In this way, when the variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probability variation jackpot is received, the non-probability variation symbol is determined after the non-probability variation symbol is derived and displayed at the end of the variation of the decorative symbol. If it is determined that is a probable big hit, then it is sufficient to promote the non-probable variable symbol to a probabilistic symbol in the subsequent redraw lottery effect. If it is determined that it is, the probability variation symbol must be demoted to a non-probability variation symbol, and such an effect may discourage the player and reduce the interest of the game. In this embodiment, even if a small hit symbol is provisionally determined as the provisionally determined symbol, the re-lottery effect is not executed.

  In the example of FIG. 121, when a symbol information designation command is missed even though a variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probable variation jackpot is received, the non-probable variation symbol “444” is temporarily determined as a stop symbol for the decorative symbol. Then, at the end of the variation of the decorative symbol, the uncertain variation symbol “444” is derived and displayed (temporary stop display). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the re-lottery effect should be executed based on the contents of the fanfare command (steps S635 and S636), and when it is determined that the re-lottery effect should be executed. The probability variation symbol derived and displayed in the re-lottery effect is determined (step S637), and the timing for executing the re-lottery effect is determined (steps S638 to S642). In the example of FIG. 121, it is assumed that the re-lottery effect is determined to be executed during the ending effect.

  As shown in FIG. 121, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the big hit game based on the reception of the fanfare command, and performs the production of each round (production during the round) based on the reception of the command for opening the big prize opening. Execution is performed in order, and effects between the rounds (interval effects) are sequentially performed on the basis of the reception of the command after the special winning opening is opened. And the ending effect which alert | reports the end of jackpot based on reception of an ending command is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 121, a re-lottery effect is executed in the ending effect. Specifically, re-variation is started in a state in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are aligned in the same design, and then an effect is performed in which a probable variation symbol (“777” in the example of FIG. 121) is derived and displayed. . Then, the player is informed that the state will enter (change) into the probability variation state.

  Next, the operation of the VDP 109 will be described. The VDP 109 executes various processes based on commands from the effect control CPU 101. Specifically, a value corresponding to data included in the command from the presentation control CPU 101 (data indicated by the command) is set in the drawing control register 95, and the VDP 109 confirms the value of the drawing control register 95, Various processes are executed based on the value.

  FIG. 122 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a transfer control process executed by the VDP 109. In the transfer control process, the drawing control unit 91 of the VDP 109 first determines whether or not there is a command serving as a display control command received from the effect control CPU 101 via the CPU I / F 92 (step S1501). If there is no reception command from the effect control CPU 101 (N in step S1501), the process in step S1501 is repeatedly executed and awaits.

  If there is a reception command in step S1501 (Y in step S1501), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a storage area setting command (step S1502). If the command is a storage area setting command (Y in step S1502), a predetermined storage area setting process is executed (step S1503). It is determined whether it is a command (step S1504).

  If the received command is a pre-transfer command in step S1504 (Y in step S1504), a predetermined pre-transfer process is executed (step S1505), but if it is not a pre-transfer command (N in step S1504), the received command is It is determined whether the command is an automatic transfer display command (step S1506). If the received command is an automatic transfer display command in step S1506 (Y in step S1506), a predetermined automatic transfer control process is executed (step S1507). If the received command is not an automatic transfer display command in step S1506 (N in step S1506) or after executing the process in step S1507, the process returns to step S1501.

  FIG. 123 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the storage area setting process executed in step S1503. In the storage area setting process, the drawing control unit 91 of the VDP 109 first clears the VRAM 84 and initializes the stored contents (step S1521). Subsequently, the address STADD serving as the start address of the automatic transfer area 155B is specified from the data included in the storage area setting command (step S1522). Then, the address STADD specified at this time is set and stored in the internal register of the VDP 109 (step S1523). Further, the drawing control unit 91 specifies the address ENADD that is the final address of the automatic transfer area 155B from the data included in the storage area setting command (step S1524). Then, the address ENADD specified at this time is set and stored in the internal register of the VDP 109 (step S1525), and the storage area setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 124 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the advance transfer process executed in step S1505. In the pre-transfer process, the drawing control unit 91 of the VDP 109 first specifies the image data read address in the CGROM 83 from the data included in the pre-transfer command (step S1541). Subsequently, the writing address of the image data in the fixed address area 155A of the VRAM 84 is specified from the data included in the advance transfer command (step S1542). Further, the amount of image data to be transferred is specified from the data included in the advance transfer command (step S1543). Then, based on the read address, the write address, and the data amount of the image data specified in steps S1541 to S1543, the data transfer start setting is performed to transfer the image data read from the CGROM 83 to the fixed address area 155A (steps). S1544). For example, in step S1544, the drawing control unit 91 sets the image data amount as the read address of the CGROM 83, the write address of the VRAM 84, and the transfer data amount in a predetermined DMA device, and transfers the image data by DMA transfer. Instruct the start.

  Thereafter, the drawing control unit 91 determines whether or not the transfer of the image data has been completed (step S1545). If not completed (N in step S1545), the drawing control unit 91 repeats the process of step S1545 and waits. On the other hand, for example, if it is determined in step S1545 that the transfer of image data has been completed based on the output of a predetermined transfer completion signal from the DMA device (Y in step S1545), all the index tables included in the VDP 109 are included. After the completion of the transfer of the image data of the part image is registered (step S1546), the advance transfer process is terminated. In the processing of step S1546, the drawing control unit 91 writes data such as “start address” and “horizontal size” that can identify the image data transferred to the fixed address area 155A in the index table, and the corresponding “transfer”. Set “completion flag” to “on”.

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the automatic transfer process executed in step S1507. In the automatic transfer process, the drawing control unit 91 of the VDP 109 first specifies the read address of the image data in the CGROM 83 from the data included in the automatic transfer display command (step S1561). Subsequently, the writing address of the image data in the automatic transfer area 155B of the VRAM 84 is specified (step S1562). For example, in the processing of step S1562, the drawing control unit 91 refers to the index table, and in the automatic transfer area 155B, the “transfer completion flag” is “on” and valid image data is stored. Identify free areas other than areas. Of the vacant areas thus identified, an area for storing the image data to be transferred this time is determined, and the head address thereof is identified as the write address.

  Subsequently, the drawing control unit 91 specifies the amount of image data to be transferred from the data included in the automatic transfer display command (step S1563). Then, based on the read address, the write address, and the data amount of the image data specified in steps S1561 to S1563, the data transfer start setting is performed in order to transfer the image data read from the CGROM 83 to the automatic transfer area 155B (step). S1564). For example, in step S1564, the drawing control unit 91 sets the data amount of the image data as the read address of the CGROM 83, the write address of the VRAM 84, and the transfer data amount in a predetermined DMA device, and transfers the image data by DMA transfer. Instruct the start.

  Thereafter, the drawing control unit 91 determines whether or not the transfer of the image data is completed (step S1565). If not completed (N in step S1565), the drawing control unit 91 repeats the process of step S1565 and waits. On the other hand, for example, if it is determined in step S1565 that the transfer of image data has been completed based on the output of a predetermined transfer completion signal from the DMA device (Y in step S1565), all the index tables included in the VDP 109 are included. After the completion of the transfer of the image data of the part image is registered (step S1566), the automatic transfer process is terminated. In the processing of step S1566, the drawing control unit 91 writes data such as “start address” and “horizontal size” that can identify the image data transferred to the automatic transfer area 155B in the index table, and the corresponding “transfer”. Set “completion flag” to “on”.

  FIG. 126 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a drawing process executed by the VDP 109. In the drawing process, the drawing control unit 91 of the VDP 109 first determines whether or not there is a command serving as a display control command received from the effect control CPU 101 via the CPU I / F 92 (step S1601). If there is no reception command from the effect control CPU 101 (N in step S1601), the process of step S1601 is repeatedly executed and awaits.

  If there is a received command in step S1601 (Y in step S1601), it is determined whether the received command is a fixed address designation display command (step S1602). If it is a fixed address designation display command (Y in step S1602), a predetermined fixed address designation display process is executed (step S1603), but if it is not a fixed address designation display command (N in step S1602), a received command Is an automatic transfer display command (step S1604).

  If the received command is an automatic transfer display command in step S1604 (Y in step S1604), a predetermined automatic transfer display process is executed (step S1605). If the received command is not an automatic transfer display command in step S1604 (N in step S1604) or after executing the process in step S1605, the process returns to step S1601.

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the fixed address designation display process executed in step S1603. In the fixed address designation display process, the drawing control unit 91 of the VDP 109 first specifies the read address of the image data in the fixed address area 155A of the VRAM 84 from the data included in the fixed address designation display command (step S1621). Subsequently, the index table is referred to based on the read address specified in step S1621, and it is determined whether or not the “transfer completion flag” associated with the image data to be read is “ON” (step). S1622).

  If the “transfer completion flag” is “ON” in step S1622 (Y in step S1622), the image data write address in the frame buffer 156 is specified from the data included in the fixed address designation display command (step S1622). Step S1623).

  Thereafter, the drawing control unit 91 reads the image data from the read address specified in step S1621, and writes it in the write address specified in step S1623 (step S1624). Then, it is determined whether or not drawing by writing image data in the frame buffer 156 is completed (step S1625). If not completed (N in step S1625), the read address and the write address are updated ( Step S1626) and the process returns to step S1621. On the other hand, if the drawing is completed in step S1625 (Y in step S1625), the fixed address designation display process is terminated.

  The display data (image data) written in the frame buffer 156 is read from the frame buffer 156 by the display signal control unit 87, converted into gradation data, and output to the variable display device 9. . As a result, it is displayed on the screen of the variable display device 9.

  If the “transfer completion flag” is “OFF” in step S1622 (N in step S1622), it is determined whether a predetermined transfer completion waiting time has elapsed (step S1627). At this time, if the transfer completion waiting time has not elapsed (N in Step S1627), the process returns to Step S1622 and waits. On the other hand, when the transfer completion waiting time has elapsed in step S1627 (Y in step S1627), for example, by transmitting predetermined error information to the production control CPU 101 via the CPU I / F 92. After notifying that an error has occurred (step S1628), the fixed address designation display process is terminated. When the CPU 101 for effect control receives the error information from the VDP 109, the control for notifying that an error state has occurred, for example, displaying an error screen or transmitting an error command to the lamp driver board 35 to obtain a predetermined value. Control is performed to turn on a lamp or the like with a lighting pattern. The same applies to step S1649 described later.

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the automatic transfer display process executed in step S1605. In the automatic transfer display process, the drawing control unit 91 first specifies the read address of the image data in the automatic transfer area 155B of the VRAM 84 from the data included in the automatic transfer display command (step S1641). Subsequently, the index table is referred to based on the read address specified in step S1641, and it is determined whether or not the “transfer completion flag” associated with the image data to be read is “ON” (step). S1642).

  If the “transfer completion flag” is “ON” in step S1642 (Y in step S1642), the writing address of the image data in the frame buffer 156 is specified from the data included in the automatic transfer display command (step S1642). S1643). Thereafter, the drawing control unit 91 reads the image data from the read address specified in step S1641 and writes it to the write address specified in step S1643 (step S1644). Then, it is determined whether or not drawing by writing image data to the frame buffer 156 is completed (step S1645). If not completed (N in step S1645), the read address and the write address are updated ( Step S1646) and the process returns to step S1641. On the other hand, if drawing is completed in step S1645 (Y in step S1645), the “transfer completion flag” registered in the index table in association with the image data used for drawing is cleared to “off” ( In step S1647), the automatic transfer display process is terminated.

  The display data (image data) written in the frame buffer 156 is read from the frame buffer 156 by the display signal control unit 87, converted into gradation data, and output to the variable display device 9. . As a result, it is displayed on the screen of the variable display device 9.

  If the “transfer completion flag” is “OFF” in step S1642 (N in step S1642), it is determined whether a predetermined transfer completion waiting time has elapsed (step S1648). At this time, if the transfer completion waiting time has not elapsed (N in step S1648), the process returns to step S1642 and waits. On the other hand, when the transfer completion waiting time has elapsed in step S1648 (Y in step S1648), for example, by transmitting predetermined error information to the CPU 101 for effect control via the CPU I / F 92. After notifying that an error has occurred (step S1649), the automatic transfer display process is terminated.

  As described above, according to the first embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the chance pattern (sudden probability change as a special display result) based on the variation pattern command or the symbol information designation command from the game control microcomputer 560. A symbol, a small hit symbol, or a chance chance for production), and when it is determined that it is a chance eye, a combination of decorative symbols that are derived and displayed is determined as a chance (steps S663, S679, S680B, etc.), and when it is determined that the reach state is reached and is out of place based on the variation pattern command, the reach symbol (left and right symbol) is determined in the reach determination loss determination process (step S655), and the reach symbol is determined. Table (difference between middle symbol and reach symbol) Using the symbol selection table (H-4, H-5)), the middle symbol is determined based on the difference, and based on the variation pattern command, it is determined that the reach state is not reached and is out of place. When the table is set so that the combination of the decorative symbols that are derived and displayed is not a chance and the left and right symbols are not the same (reach state) in the reach no-miss determination process (step S654) The combination of decorative symbols is determined using the table (T-3)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the decorative symbol determination process in the effect control microcomputer 100 while reducing the control burden on the game control microcomputer 560.

  Also, when determining the middle symbol in the reach no-miss determination process, the middle symbol selection table that selects the middle symbol that does not become the chance according to the left and right symbols is selected using the chance-forbidden table, and the selected middle symbol selection table. Because it is configured to determine the middle symbol using, when the combination of the left middle right symbol is judged not to be a chance, the chance symbol is reliably prevented from being displayed as a missed symbol. can do.

  Also, when determining the middle symbol, select the middle symbol selection table that does not become a symbol similar to the chance (according similarity symbol, small hit similar symbol) according to the left and right symbols using the table for chance prohibition rule, Since it is configured to determine the middle symbol using the selected middle symbol selection table, it is possible to reliably prevent a symbol similar to the chance symbol from being derived and displayed as a missed symbol. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the chance eyes are derived and displayed.

  Also, in the loss determination process with reach, the shift after super reach (single reach or double reach) rather than the symbol selection table during normal shift used when determining the shift pattern after normal reach (single / double reach) is determined. In the super development time symbol selection table used when determining symbols, the determination values are distributed so that the symbol difference with respect to the left and right symbols decreases at a higher rate. That is, in the symbol selection table during normal deviation shown in FIG. 60, the number of determination values allocated to the symbol difference “−1” and “+1” is 4 or 5, but the symbol during super development shown in FIG. In the selection table, the number of determination values assigned to symbol differences “−1” and “+1” is 7 or 8. Therefore, depending on the fluctuation pattern such as normal reach or super reach, for example, it becomes possible to vary the ratio of reaching out-of-reach symbols that are close to the big hit symbol (for example, a one-frame misaligned symbol).

  In addition, in the symbol selection table during normal deviation, which is used when determining a symbol after a normal reach (single / double common reach), the judgment value is changed depending on whether a single reach is established or a double reach is established. The difference between the reach symbols is determined using the tables with different fractions, and the middle symbol is determined. Therefore, depending on the number of effective lines to reach, the reach-disappearing symbol close to the big hit symbol (for example, one frame deviation) It is possible to vary the ratio of the ill-fated pattern. In addition, since the determination value is not assigned to the symbol difference “−2” with respect to the reach symbol in the double reach table, it is possible to prevent the big hit symbol from being reliably derived and displayed.

  In addition, the normal middle symbol temporary stop selection table used when determining the temporary stop symbol before the execution of the relief effect is more preferable than the normal symbol middle symbol selection table used when determining the lost symbol after normal reach. The determination values are distributed so that the symbol difference with respect to the left and right symbols decreases at a high rate. That is, in the symbol selection table during normal deviation shown in FIG. 60, the number of determination values assigned to the symbol difference “−1” and “+1” is 4 or 5, but the normal middle symbol for normal shown in FIG. In the stop selection table, the number of determination values assigned to the symbol differences “−1” and “+1” is 7 or 8. Therefore, for example, if the symbol is a devastating one frame shift, the rate at which the relief effect is executed is high. Accordingly, it is possible to make the player have an interest in the symbols that are out of normal reach.

  In addition, when the production control microcomputer 100 misses the symbol information designation command even though it has received the variation pattern command for both the normal jackpot / probability variation jackpot (Y in step S629, N in step S630, S631). N), a non-probable variation symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed (step S632, FIG. 95), and the determined decorative symbol is derived and displayed (step S842). According to such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to recognize whether or not a big hit game is generated even if the production control microcomputer 100 misses the design information designation command, and the production control command related to the design of the decorative design. By reducing the number of commands, the control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits an ending command indicating whether or not to shift to the probable change state after completion of the big hit game and whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect (steps S451 to S452), and the effect control microcomputer. When the computer 100 specifies execution of the re-lottery effect based on the content of the ending command from the game control microcomputer 560 (Y in step S955), the re-lottery effect is executed after the end of the big hit game (step S956). , S972). According to such a configuration, since the lottery effect may be executed until the next symbol variable display starts even after the end of the big hit game, the expectation for the transition to the probability change state is further increased. Can last for a period of time.

  Further, when the effect control microcomputer 100 specifies that the promotion effect is not executed based on the content of the ending command (N in step S955), the ending effect that does not execute the promotion effect after the end of the big hit game is executed. (Steps S957 and S972). According to such a configuration, it is understood that the promotion effect is not performed even after the end of the big hit game, and the player can easily grasp the game state after the end of the big hit game.

  When the effect control microcomputer 100 determines to execute the notice effect (step S817), it selects the character notice effect corresponding to the already determined reach symbol or jackpot symbol (for example, reach symbol or When the jackpot symbol is determined to be “1”, the notice announcement effect of the character associated with the symbol “1” is selected; step S818), which corresponds to the reach symbol or jackpot symbol. A notice effect using a character can be executed, and a process of replacing a symbol already determined after a symbol other than a reach symbol or a jackpot symbol is displayed with a symbol used in the notice effect becomes unnecessary.

  In addition, the background image is variably displayed in the direction opposite to the direction in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed, and the background image is variably displayed at a different speed depending on the part. At the same time, a sense of perspective is given to the variably displayed background image to further increase the reality.

  In the above embodiment, when the re-lottery effect is executed after the big hit game is started, the non-probable variable symbol is always promoted to the probable variable symbol. However, the non-probable variable symbol is not promoted to the probable variable symbol. A re-lottery effect may be executed. In this case, the same effect (revariation of non-probabilistic variation symbol) as the case of promotion to probability variation symbol is executed until the middle of the re-lottery production, and then the probability variation big hit instead of the notification of probability variation big hit (stop display of probability variation symbol) A notification to the effect that it will not become (stop display of a non-probable variation symbol) will be performed. In addition, the execution time of the re-lottery effect that is not promoted to the probability variable symbol is set to be the same as the execution time (for example, 10 seconds) of the re-lottery effect that is promoted to the probability variable symbol.

  In addition, when transitioning to the probable state, the execution time of the ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect is made shorter than the execution time of the ending effect that executes the re-lottery effect. When there is no need to notify the user, it can be avoided that the production is unnecessarily performed for a long time.

  Further, on the condition that the game control microcomputer 560 is determined to be a big hit, a fanfare command indicating whether or not to shift to the probable change state is transmitted (steps S366 and S367) for effect control. When the microcomputer 100 has not received the symbol information designation command (Y in step S635), a fanfare command (fanfare 2 indicating that the non-probable variation symbol has been provisionally determined and has been determined to shift to the probability variation state). (4 designation command) is received (Y in step S636), the promotion effect for informing that the state is shifted to the probability change state is executed at a predetermined timing (step S947 based on the re-lottery execution flag set in step S642). Alternatively, it is determined in step S955 that the re-lottery effect needs to be executed. , Which is configured to perform the steps S948, S923 or steps S956, S972), it is possible to take the matching of the display results to be displayed on the gaming machine interior control state and variable display device 9.

  In addition, when the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the promotion effect from the start to the end of the jackpot game, the promotion effect is displayed from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the variable display of the symbol. It is prohibited to execute (when the re-lottery effect is performed during the big hit round, it is determined that it is not necessary to execute the re-lottery effect in the ending in step S955 by setting the re-lottery execution completed flag in step S949. Therefore, it is possible to prevent useless control of executing the promotion effect again after executing the promotion effect.

  In addition, when sudden probability change big hit is determined, it is configured to derive and display the chance chance (sudden probability change symbol) for the surprise that the left, middle and right symbols are not aligned with the same symbol, and shift the gaming state to the probability variation state Therefore, when changing to the probability change state, the 15-round big hit symbol (a combination of symbols with the same left and right symbols in the same symbol) is not derived and displayed, so the probability change suddenly without shifting to the big hit gaming state It can be recognized that the state has been changed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, since a combination of symbols that are not derived and displayed as outlier symbols is derived and displayed as a chance for a surprise, the player can be surely recognized that the state has shifted to the probability change state.

  In the above embodiment, in the reach determination losing determination process, the middle symbol is determined by the difference with respect to the reach symbol in both cases of single reach and double reach. Alternatively, the middle symbol may be determined by the difference with respect to the left symbol or the right symbol in the middle and lower stages.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the symbol information designation command is missed after suddenly receiving the variation pattern command for both probabilistic large hit / small hit, the small hit symbol is tentatively determined and displayed. (See step S684 in FIG. 95). However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the probability variation pattern may be tentatively determined and displayed. The small hit symbol and the sudden probability variation symbol may be a common symbol. Further, when the time mission rush effect is executed (when the variation pattern command of the variation number 89 is received), the symbol “135”, when the sudden probability variation / small hit common rush effect is performed (the variation pattern of the variation number 90) When the command is received), the symbol “357” is displayed. When the sudden change sudden entry effect is executed (when the variation pattern command with the variation number 91 is received), the symbol “531” is used. You may make it display.

  In the above embodiment, the execution timing of the re-lottery effect is set to be during the big hit game (during the round) or during the ending effect after the big hit game ends. Any timing may be used as long as it is between the end and the start of a new change. For example, the fanfare effect may be in progress or the interval display may be in progress. And it may be comprised so that the execution timing of such a re-lottery effect may be designated with a symbol information designation command. In this case, the execution time of the fanfare effect, the display time of the interval display, and the like may be varied depending on the presence / absence of the redrawing effect. Further, the number of re-drawing effects after the start of the big hit game may be once or three times or more.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the case where the symbol information designation command is missed, the non-probable variation symbol is determined and displayed, and whether or not the re-lottery effect is executed according to the content of the fanfare command received thereafter, and Although the execution timing has been confirmed (steps S636, S637, and S638), when the ending command is received, it may be configured to confirm whether or not the re-lottery effect is performed according to the content of the ending command. . Even with such a configuration, the control state inside the gaming machine and the display result displayed on the variable display device 9 can be matched. In this case, the processing of steps S635 to 637 in FIG. 45 may be executed when an ending command is received. In addition, when it is necessary to execute the re-lottery effect when the ending command is received, the re-lottery effect must be executed during the ending effect, so the process of determining the execution timing of the re-lottery effect (steps S638 to S638). S642) is not necessary.

  In the above embodiment, the symbol information designation command is used to designate whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect after the big hit game and the execution timing. However, the symbol information designation command is used to execute the re-lottery effect. You may comprise so that presence / absence etc. may not be designated. With such a configuration, the types of symbol information designation commands can be reduced, and the control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced. In the case of such a configuration, the production control microcomputer 100 uniquely determines whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect after the big hit game and the execution timing. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect using a predetermined random number, and executes the re-lottery effect at a predetermined timing based on the determination result.

  In addition, with the symbol information designation command, the presence / absence and execution timing of the re-lottery effect after the big hit game is designated, and the production control microcomputer 100 independently determines whether or not the re-lottery effect after the big hit game is executed and the execution timing. It may be configured to determine. In such a configuration, it is specified that the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending by the symbol information specifying command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 decides uniquely that the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, and conversely The symbol information designation command specifies that the re-lottery effect is to be executed during the big hit, and the effect control microcomputer 100 may uniquely determine that the re-lottery effect is to be executed during the ending. In this case, if the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending and the re-lottery effect is executed even in the ending even though the re-lottery effect is executed and promoted to the probability variation symbol, the re-lottery effect execution timing cannot be matched. Therefore, when the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, processing for prohibiting the execution of the re-lottery effect during the ending is executed. Specifically, when the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, a flag indicating that is set, and based on the fact that the flag is set, it is decided to execute the re-lottery effect during the ending. Even if it is, it controls so that a re-lottery effect is not performed.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 designates only the promotion timing (fluctuating, big hit, or ending) with the variation pattern command or the symbol information designation command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 is always re-started at the timing designated by the command. The execution control microcomputer 100 redraws the lottery effect (with promotion) with respect to the execution timing of the other re-lottery effect before promotion and the execution timing of the re-lottery effect when not promoted (usually in the case of big hit). It may be determined by lottery whether or not to produce (no promotion).

  In the above-described embodiment, the background image is divided into a plurality of layers 1 to 4 and the images of the respective layers are variably displayed in the direction opposite to the variable display direction at different speeds. However, a background image of a movie image that is not divided into a plurality of layers may be prepared, and the background image of the movie image may be variably displayed in the direction opposite to the variable display direction. In this case, similar to the case shown in FIG. 103, the image of the nearby star fluctuates at a high speed, the image of Jupiter fluctuates at a slower speed than the image of the nearby star, and the image of Saturn is slower than the image of Jupiter. When the background image divided into a plurality of layers 1 to 4 is variably displayed by configuring the movie image in advance so that the image of a distant star fluctuates at a lower speed than the image of Saturn. Can be displayed in the same manner. Note that the decorative pattern image is generally composed of a sprite image.

  In addition, the image of a distant star is used as the background image of the entire screen, and the image of Saturn, Jupiter, and the image of a nearby star are overlaid on the background image. When performing the image and the notice effect, the notice image is superimposed so that the background image of the distant star, the image of Saturn, the image of Jupiter, and the image of the nearby star are displayed in a variable direction opposite to the variable display direction. May be. In this case, in the frame buffer 156 (display area) of the VRAM 84, an image of a distant star is drawn, and an image of Saturn, an image of Jupiter, and an image of a nearby star are drawn on the image of the distant star. A decorative design image is drawn on the image. Then, the drawing position of the nearby star image is largely moved (for example, moved upward by 10 dots) so that the nearby star image fluctuates at high speed, and the Jupiter image is moved to the nearby star. The Jupiter image drawing position at each screen change is moved by a predetermined distance (for example, 6 dots upward) so that the image of Saturn fluctuates at a lower speed than the image of Jupiter. As described above, the drawing position of the Saturn image at each screen change is moved by a predetermined distance (for example, moved upward by 4 dots) so that the background image of the distant star fluctuates at a lower speed than the Saturn image. The drawing position of a distant star image for each screen change is moved small (for example, moved upward by 2 dots). Thereby, it can be set as the display mode similar to the case where the background image divided | segmented into the some layers 1-4 is variably displayed. In this case, not only the decorative pattern image, but also the Saturn image, the Jupiter image, and the nearby star image are constituted by, for example, sprite images.

  Further, the background image may be changed at the same speed without changing the background image at different speeds. Even with such a configuration, a sense of speed with respect to the variable display of the decorative symbols is increased, and a novel impression can be given to the player.

  In addition, the background image may be switched when normal reach or super reach is developed from normal fluctuation, or when a big hit or the like occurs. For example, the background of the universe composed of star images may be switched to a special background according to the super reach or the big hit effect. In this case, it will be returned to the cosmic background at the stage when the super reach effect or the big hit effect is finished, but the background image scrolling may be resumed from the background state when switching to the super reach effect or the like. , Keep scrolling the background image internally (not visible to the player, but update the position of the background image even when a super reach etc. is being performed), a super reach effect, etc. The scrolling of the background image may be resumed from the background state at the timing when the process ends.

  Further, the background in the normal gaming state, the background in the probability changing state (probability changing short state) and the background in the time shortening state may be different backgrounds, and the background may be switched when the gaming state is switched. In this case, the image itself may be changed to a different background, or only the background color may be changed to a different background (for example, the background color is black in the normal gaming state, and the background color is in the probable state) Is red, and when the time is short, the background color is blue). Further, the background may be changed between when the effect mode is the chance mode and when in the normal effect mode. Also in this case, the image itself may be changed to be a different background, or only the background color may be changed to be a different background (for example, the background color is black in the normal production mode, and in the chance mode The background color is red).

  Further, the scroll direction of the decorative symbols and the scroll direction of the background image may be changed according to the gaming state. For example, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the scroll direction of the decorative pattern is from the top to the bottom, the scroll direction of the background image is from the bottom to the top direction, and when the gaming state is the probable state, When the scroll direction is from right to left, the background image is scrolled from left to right, and the game state is short-time state, the decorative symbol scroll direction is from left to right and the background image scroll direction. Is the direction from right to left. Further, the scroll direction of the decorative symbols and the scroll direction of the background image may be changed between the chance mode and the normal effect mode. For example, when the effect mode is the normal effect mode, the scroll direction of the decorative pattern is from the top to the bottom, the scroll direction of the background image is from the bottom to the top, and when the effect mode is the chance mode, the decorative pattern is Is the right-to-left scroll direction, and the background image scroll direction is the left-to-right direction.

  In the first embodiment, in the normal production mode, there are 5 effective lines (upper horizontal line, middle horizontal line, lower horizontal line, lower right line, higher right line). Production is performed. On the other hand, chance mode to enter after sudden probability big hits and small hits occur (mode to enter after time mission effect, sudden probability change / small hit common rush effect, sudden probability change rush effect is executed, and two rounds effect is executed ), The effect is performed with one effective line (the middle horizontal line). That is, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are switched to an effect that varies by one line in the middle.

  Further, in the above-described first embodiment, in the normal production mode, the probability variation big hit is assumed when five symbols “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, and “8” are aligned on the effective line. However, in the chance mode, when 6 symbols of “1”, “3”, “5”, “6”, “7”, and “8” are aligned on the effective line, it is possible to make a probable big hit. In this case, the ratio of the specific symbols in the decorative symbols (specific symbol ratio) is 6/8 = 75%. Note that the probability (proportion of probability variation jackpots) of probability variation jackpots (excluding sudden probability variation jackpots) with respect to the probability of 15 rounds jackpots is the same as in the normal performance mode. In this way, by improving the ratio of specific symbols during chance mode compared to during normal performance mode, certain symbols are derived and displayed in chance mode rather than during normal performance mode. If the ratio is high, the player can think, and as a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced. It should be noted that the ratio of a specific symbol may be improved as compared with that in the normal gaming state when the probability mode is controlled (including the probability variation time short state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player think that a specific symbol is derived and displayed in the probability variation state and the probability that the probability variation big hit (the proportion that the probability variation state is continued) is high. You will be able to enhance your interest. In other words, in the normal gaming state or in the short-time state, the player is happy if the big hit (non-probable big hit) is a big hit, but in the probable state, the probabilistic state ends when the normal big hit. Therefore, the player wants not only a big hit but also a promising big hit. Therefore, when the player is in the probabilistic state, expecting a probable big hit, increasing the ratio of a specific symbol in the probable state will attract the player's interest and further enhance the interest of the game. it can.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
In the first embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 specifies the fluctuation time (the contents of the fluctuation pattern) based only on the contents of the fluctuation pattern command. However, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern Based on the contents of the command and the design information designation command, the fluctuation time (the contents of the fluctuation pattern) is specified.

  The following cases can be considered as an example in which the production control microcomputer 100 specifies the variation time based on the content of the variation pattern command and the content of the symbol information designation command.

(1) A variation pattern command for designating the variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable big hit when the variation control time varies depending on whether the variation pattern for normal big hit / probable big hit is normal big hit or probable big hit When the symbol information designation command received thereafter designates the normal jackpot or the probability variation jackpot, the variation time is specified.

(2) The effect control microcomputer 100 when the variation pattern for the big hit is common to the normal big hit / probable big hit, and the variation time varies depending on whether the big hit is the normal big hit or the probable big hit, and the presence / absence of the redrawing effect. However, when a variation pattern command specifying a variation pattern for jackpot is received, whether the symbol information designation command received after that specifies a normal jackpot, a probability variation jackpot is specified, or execution of a re-lottery effect is designated. The change time is specified depending on whether or not

(3) When the variation pattern with reach is common to outliers / big hits and the display result is out of place or big hit, and the fluctuation time varies depending on the type of big hit, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the fluctuation pattern command. The variation time is specified according to the contents of the symbol information designation command received after the reception of (1).

  FIG. 129 is a flowchart illustrating an example of symbol information designation command reception waiting processing in the second embodiment. In the symbol information designation command reception waiting process, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether the symbol information command reception flag is set (step S1811). The symbol information command reception flag is set in step S624. If the symbol information command reception flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the content (variation number) designated by the variation pattern command already received and stored and the content designated by the symbol information designation command (disagreement). The variation pattern (variation time) of the decorative symbol is determined based on the normal big hit, the probability variation big hit, etc. (step S1812). Thereafter, the effect control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the notice selection process (step S801) (step S1813). As described above, since the variation of the decorative symbol is started based on the reception of the symbol information designation command, the symbol information designation command plays a role of a command for designating the variation start in the second embodiment. Become.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, since the variation time (the content of the variation pattern) is specified based on the content of the variation pattern command and the content of the symbol information designation command, the variation The number of pattern commands can be reduced, and the processing burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  In the second embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 is configured to start the variation of the decorative symbol based on the reception of the symbol information designation command. Similarly, decoration pattern variation may be started based on the reception of the variation pattern command. In this case, the fluctuation time is not yet specified at the time of reception of the fluctuation pattern command, but in response to the reception of the fluctuation pattern command, the decoration pattern is started for the time being and based on the contents of the symbol information designation command received thereafter. The variation time is specified, and the timing of the variation end of the decorative symbol is adjusted. For example, if the fluctuation time varies depending on whether the normal big hit / probable big hit combined fluctuation pattern is a normal big hit or the probable big hit, the variation of the decorative pattern is started based on the reception of the normal big hit / probable big hit combined variation pattern. The time of the part which changes depending on whether the symbol information designation command to be received normally designates a big jackpot or a probable big jackpot is adjusted by adding later.

  In addition to the configuration of the second embodiment, the following configuration is also conceivable. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the variation pattern and also determines the stop symbol (left middle right symbol) of the decorative symbol. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a change pattern command and a command for designating the left middle right design, and the effect control microcomputer 100 specifies a reference change time based on the contents of the change pattern command, and the left The time for the change time with respect to the reference time is specified by the content of the command for designating the middle right symbol. For example, if the left and right symbols specified by the command specifying the left middle right symbol are the same symbol and reach is established, the symbol difference between the left and right symbols (reach symbol) of the middle symbol specified by the command specifying the left middle right symbol In accordance with (the number of deviations when reaching reach), the time of change with respect to the reference time of the variation time is specified. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to specify the variation time corresponding to the stop symbol of the decorative symbol on the production control microcomputer 100 side.

Embodiment 3 FIG.
In the first embodiment, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives a variation pattern command for designating a variation pattern with reach at the time of loss, the reach design is determined, and the reach design and the final stop design ( In the above example, the middle symbol) is determined, and the final stop symbol is determined from the determined symbol difference. However, in the third embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 560 determines the variation pattern accompanied by the reach at the time of loss, it determines the final stop symbol and designates the final stop symbol by the variation pattern command. . Then, when the received variation pattern command specifies the variation pattern with reach and the final stop symbol, the production control microcomputer 100 stops using the table in which the final stop symbol and the reach symbol are associated with each other. Determine the design.

  FIG. 130 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol arrangement of decorative symbols in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 130, in the third embodiment, the variable display device 9 has a three-dimensional display area (decorative symbol display area) in which the decorative symbols are arranged in the horizontal direction (in this embodiment, The display is variably displayed from right to left. That is, the decorative design is configured to scroll horizontally. In the upper, middle, and lower display areas, three consecutive frames of decorative symbols are stopped when variable display of decorative symbols is stopped (see FIG. 132). In the third embodiment as well, the background image may be displayed in a variable direction in the direction opposite to the direction in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed. As described above, when the decorative symbol variable display direction is the right-to-left direction, the background image variable display direction is the left-to-right direction.

  As the decorative symbols displayed in the three display areas of the variable display device 9, the symbols “1” to “9” and the symbol “*” indicating a blank between the symbols are used. . As shown in FIG. 130, the decorative symbols in the upper display area are “9” “*” “8” “*” “7” “*” “6” “*” “5” “*” “4” “ * "3" "*" "2" "*" "1" "*". The decorative pattern in the middle display area is “1” “*” “2” “*” “3” “*” “4” “*” “5” “*” “6” “*” “7” “*” "" 8 "" * "" 9 "" * "" 4 "" * ". The decorative pattern in the lower display area is “1” “*” “2” “*” “3” “*” “4” “*” “5” “*” “6” “*” “7” “*” "" 8 "" * "" 9 "" * ". As described above, the number of symbols is set as many as the decorative symbols in the middle display area and the symbols “4” and “*”.

  During variable display (fluctuation) of decorative symbols, as a general rule, the upper display area displays the decorative symbols “9”, “*”, “8”, “*”. "1", "*", "2" ... "4" "*" decorative symbols are displayed in numerical order, the lower display area is "1" "*" "2" ... "9" “*” Decorative symbols are displayed in numerical order. Note that the decorative symbol displayed in the upper display area is referred to as the “upper symbol”, the decorative symbol displayed in the middle display region is referred to as the “middle symbol”, and the decorative symbol displayed in the lower display region is “ Sometimes referred to as the “design below”.

  FIG. 131 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation pattern in the third embodiment. In FIG. 131, only the variation pattern for detachment is shown when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is “missing symbol”. “Table” indicates the table number of the table used when determining the decorative design. In the example shown in FIG. 131, when the fluctuation pattern of “normal fluctuation” and the fluctuation pattern of “normal fluctuation at short time” (variation patterns of fluctuation numbers 1 and 2) are used, the table (T-1) shown in the first embodiment is used. , 2, 3, 4; the number of symbols is different between the first embodiment and the third embodiment, and the symbols set in the table must be changed in accordance with the change in the number of symbols). Further, in the case of a variation pattern with reach (variation pattern of variation numbers 3 to 26), tables (HR, RH) described later are used (see FIGS. 134 and 135).

  As shown in FIG. 131, 20 types of variation patterns (variation patterns with variation numbers 3 to 22) are prepared for different middle symbols (final stop symbols) as variation patterns with normal reach at the time of loss. For example, in the variation pattern of “middle row 13 (* 8 *)” of variation number 3, the symbol displayed in the middle display area is “* 8 *”, that is, the symbol on the left column of the middle row is “# 8”. In “*”, the symbol in the middle row in the middle row is “8” in symbol number 15, and the symbol in the middle row in the middle row is “*” in symbol number 16. In the variation pattern of variation number 4 of “middle row 14 (8 * 9)”, the symbol displayed in the middle display area is “8 * 9”, that is, the symbol in the left column of the middle row is symbol number 15 “ 8 ”, the symbol in the middle row in the middle row is“ * ”in symbol number 16, and the symbol in the right row in the middle row is“ 9 ”in symbol number 17.

  As shown in FIG. 131, two types of variation patterns of super reach A and two types of variation patterns of super reach B are prepared as variation patterns with super reach at the time of detachment. “−1” and “+1” in the variation pattern with super reach indicate the symbol difference of the middle symbol with respect to the lower symbol of the reach symbols (upper and lower symbols). For example, when the lower symbol (lower symbol) is “1 * 2”, the middle symbol (middle symbol) of the symbol difference “−1” is “* 1 *”. In addition, when the lower symbol (lower symbol) is “1 * 2”, the middle symbol (middle symbol) of the symbol difference “+1” is “* 2 *”.

  FIG. 132 is an explanatory diagram showing a loss reach pattern in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 132, the outlier reach pattern in the third embodiment includes a reach pattern (1-1 to 1-5) of “1 reach” and a reach pattern (2-1 to 1 of “2 reach”). 2-3), reach pattern (3-1 to 3-5) of “3 reach”, reach pattern (4-1 to 4-3) of “4 reach”, and reach reach of “5” Reach pattern (5-1 to 5-5), reach pattern (6-1 to 6-3) of "6 reach", reach pattern (7-1 to 7-5) of "7 reach" , A reach pattern (8-1 to 8-3) of “8 reach” and a reach pattern (9-1 to 9-4) of “9 reach” are provided.

  FIG. 133 is a flowchart illustrating an example of reach determination loss determination processing according to the third embodiment. In the reach determination loss determination process in the third embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a reach symbol determination random number (step S2001). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a reach symbol selection table (HR, RH) corresponding to the gaming state (step S2002). Specifically, when the gaming state is a low probability state (probability change state, short time state), the reach symbol selection table (HR) shown in FIG. 134 is selected. When the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state, probability change time short state), the reach symbol selection table (HRH) shown in FIG. 135 is selected.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores a reach symbol (upper and lower symbols) using the reach symbol selection table selected in step S2002 according to the random number value extracted in step S2001 (step S2003).

  The low-probability and high-probability reach symbol selection tables are divided for each variation pattern with reach. That is, as shown in FIG. 131, 20 types of variation patterns are prepared for different middle symbols as variation patterns with normal reach at the time of loss, and reach patterns as variation patterns with super reach A at the time of loss. Two types of variation patterns are prepared for each symbol difference (“−1” “+1”) of the middle symbol with respect to the lower symbol, and as a variation pattern with super reach B at the time of loss, the bottom of the reach symbol Two types of variation patterns are prepared for each symbol difference (“−1” “+1”) of the middle symbol with respect to the symbol, and the reach symbol selection table is divided into 24 types of variation patterns with reach. . In each table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the 36 types of reach patterns (reach symbols) shown in FIG.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, no determination value is assigned to a predetermined reach pattern in the reach symbol selection table. That is, the number of determination values assigned is zero. This is in order not to generate a big hit. For example, in the table of “normal deviation 13 (* 8 *)” with the variation number 3 shown in FIG. 134, the number of determination values for the reach pattern (reach symbol) of “8-2” is zero. As shown in FIG. 132, the reach pattern “8-2” is a pattern in which “8” is arranged in the upper middle row and the lower middle row, and the middle design designated by the variation pattern. Is “* 8 *” (that is, the middle row of the middle row is “8”), so the reach pattern of “8-2” when the fluctuation pattern is “Normal out of middle row 13 (* 8 *)” When “3” is selected, three “8” s are arranged in the middle row, and a big hit occurs. In order to avoid this, a determination value is not assigned to the reach pattern of “8-2” in the table of “normal deviation middle stage 13 (* 8 *)” of the variation number 3. Further, for example, in the table of “super reach A −1” with the variation number 23 shown in FIG. 134, the number of determination values for the reach pattern (reach symbol) of “1-4” is zero. As shown in FIG. 132, the reach pattern of “1-4” has “2” arranged in the upper left column and the lower right column, and “1” in the upper right column and the lower left column. Since the pattern difference is “−1” with respect to the lower symbol designated by the variation pattern, that is, the middle row symbol “2”, the variation pattern is the arranged pattern (double reach pattern). If the reach pattern of “1-4” is selected when “Super Reach A −1”, three “2” s are aligned on the diagonal line to the lower right, resulting in a big hit. In order to avoid this, the determination value is not assigned to the reach pattern of “1-4” in the table of “super reach A −1” with the variable number 23.

  As shown in FIG. 135, the reach pattern selection table for high probability has a larger number of reach patterns to which no determination value is assigned than the reach pattern selection table for low probability. This is because, in the high probability state, a specific outcome (a serious outcome that is one frame out of the big hit symbol) is displayed as a missed outcome.

  Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol (middle symbol) which is the final stop symbol based on the content of the variation pattern command (step S2004).

  As described above, according to the third embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 can collectively determine the reach design and the final stop design based on the variation pattern command. It is possible to reduce the burden on the symbol determination at the time of loss reach in the computer 100.

  In Embodiment 3 described above, after the reach symbol is determined, the middle symbol is determined based on the variation pattern command. However, the middle symbol is determined based on the variation pattern command, and then the middle symbol is determined. Reach symbols may be determined using a table.

  In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 131, the middle symbol is designated only in the case of the variation pattern command dedicated to the loss, but the variation pattern for big hit (the variation pattern for normal big hit, Even in the case of a variation pattern dedicated to a probable big hit, the middle symbol may be designated, and the production control microcomputer 100 may determine the upper and lower symbols according to the middle symbol designated by the variation pattern command.

Embodiment 4 FIG.
In the first embodiment, after the left symbol (first stop symbol) and the right symbol (second stop symbol) are determined in the reach-less-losing determination process, the left symbol and the right symbol correspond to the chance eye prohibition pattern. In some cases, the middle symbol (final stop symbol) is determined using the middle symbol selection table in which the determination value is set so as not to catch the chance. However, in the fourth embodiment, after the left symbol (first stop symbol) is determined, the right symbol (second stop symbol) is determined by using the right symbol selection table in which the determination value is set so as not to become the chance-forbidden pattern. The symbol is determined, and then the middle symbol is determined.

  FIG. 136 is a flowchart illustrating an example of reachless loss determination processing according to the fourth embodiment. In the reach-less loss determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a left symbol determination random number (step S2101). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the left symbol of the off symbol using the left symbol selection table (T-1) shown in FIG. 48 according to the extracted random number value (step S2102). The left symbol selection table is the same table as in the first embodiment.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts the right symbol determining random number (step S2103). Then, in accordance with the extracted random number value, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the right symbol of the off symbol using the right symbol selection table (T-2A) corresponding to the left symbol shown in FIG. S2104). In the right symbol selection table, as shown in FIG. 137, a plurality of determination values are assigned to a matrix of left symbols and right symbols. A plurality of right symbol selection tables are prepared for each left symbol already determined. For example, when the determined left symbol is “8”, the uppermost table in FIG. 137 is the right symbol selection table corresponding to the left symbol “8”. The right symbol selection table (T-2A) shown in FIG. 137 is a table for determining the middle symbol of the right display area in the variable display device 9.

  In the right symbol selection table, the number of determination values assigned to the same symbol as the determined left symbol is “0” in order to prevent reach. For example, when the determined left symbol is “8”, the number of determination values assigned to the right symbol “8” in the right symbol selection table corresponding to the left symbol “8” is “0”. . When the left symbol is “*” (for example, “*” between “7” and “8”), the upper symbol on the left display area is “7” and the lower symbol is “8”. Therefore, in order to prevent reach, the right symbol “*” (“*” between “6” and “7”) in which the upper symbol of the right display region is “7”, the upper symbol of the right display region The right symbol “*” (“*” between “7” and “8”), and the lower symbol in the right display area is “8”. The number of determination values assigned to the right symbol “*” (“*” between “8” and “1”) is “0”.

  In the right symbol selection table, the number of determination values assigned to a predetermined right symbol is “0” so as not to fall under the chance-forbidden pattern. For example, when the determined left symbol is “8”, the upper symbol in the right display area is selected so as not to correspond to the chance prohibition patterns LR24, LR32, LR40, LR71, and LR76 shown in FIG. 50 and FIG. Is “8” and the lower symbol is “7”, the right symbol “*” (“*” between “7” and “8”), the upper symbol on the right display area is “1”, the lower symbol Decision value assigned to the right symbol “*” (“*” between “8” and “1”), the right symbol “2”, the right symbol “5”, and the right symbol “3” where the symbol is “8”. The number of “0” is “0”.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 selects the right symbol selection table corresponding to the left symbol determined in step S2102, and determines the symbol having the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S2103 as the right symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S2105). Then, in accordance with the extracted random number value, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol of the off symbol using the middle symbol selection table (T-3A) shown in FIG. 138 (step S2106). The middle symbol selection table is the same as the left symbol selection table shown in FIG.

  As described above, according to the fourth embodiment, the right symbol (second stop symbol) is determined using the right symbol selection table in which the determination value is set so as not to correspond to the chance eye prohibition pattern. Since it is configured, it is possible to reliably prevent the chance eye from being derived and displayed as a missed symbol when it is determined that the combination of the left, middle and right symbols does not become a chance.

Embodiment 5. FIG.
In Embodiment 1 described above, the chances of production are configured to be stopped and displayed only once during the change of the decorative pattern, but as shown in FIG. You may make it raise the expectation of jackpot.

  In the example shown in FIG. 139, when the left middle right symbol is fluctuating, after the chance eye consisting of the symbol “1” (chance eye 1C in FIG. 5) is stopped and displayed, the left middle right symbol is The chances of the symbol “2” (chance eye 2C in FIG. 5) are stopped and displayed again, the left middle right symbol is changed again, and the chances of the symbol “3” (in FIG. 5) are displayed. The chance eye 3C) is stopped and displayed, and the left, middle and right symbols fluctuate. After that, reach occurs at “3”, and the big hit symbol “333” is derived and displayed, resulting in a big hit. The fact that a symbol is stopped and displayed a plurality of times during such a single change is called a pseudo continuous change (pseudo continuous notice).

  As a method of determining a plurality of chances, for example, the first chance is determined by associating the chances that are stopped and displayed for the first time with the chances that are stopped and displayed for the second and third times in advance. To automatically determine the second and third chances, or set the chances to be stopped and displayed in the first to third times in the table and stop and display in the first to third times A configuration is possible in which the chances to be determined are determined at a time.

  As described above, it is possible to further increase the sense of expectation of the big hit by stopping and displaying the chances of production as a pseudo continuous variation a plurality of times.

  In the above-described fifth embodiment, when the chance eyes A (or chance eyes B) are continuously stopped and displayed, there is a high possibility that the chance eyes A will be a big hit according to the number of times the chance eyes A are stopped and displayed. You may make it develop into super reach. For example, if chance item A is stopped and displayed once, it will be developed into super reach A (super reach with a relatively low probability of big hit), and chance item A will be stopped and displayed twice in succession (specifically The chance eye A was stopped and displayed from the normal fluctuation, and the chance eye A was stopped and displayed again from the normal fluctuation). In this case, it may be developed to super reach C, and when chance eyes A are stopped and displayed four times in succession, it may be developed to super reach D (super reach with the highest possibility of big hit). Further, in addition to the case where the chance B (or chance A) is stopped and displayed and then developed into super reach (super reach D in the embodiment), it is normally stopped due to normal fluctuations (without reaching reach). There may be provided a case of developing to super reach (for example, super reach D) when the off symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of developing to the super reach after the display of the chance eye A or the chance eye B, normal fluctuation is performed after the chance eye A or the chance eye B is stopped and displayed, and then the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped in order. It may be a case of developing to a super reach, or a case of developing directly to a super reach directly (suddenly) without performing normal fluctuation after the chance item A or the chance item B is stopped and displayed.

Embodiment 6 FIG.
FIG. 140 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of a relay board, a sound / lamp control board, and a display control board in the sixth embodiment. In the board configuration shown in FIG. 10, the production control microcomputer 100 mounted on the production control board 80 controls the display state of the variable display device 9, and outputs control signals to the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70. Thus, the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps and the sound output of the speaker 27 are controlled. However, in the board configuration shown in FIG. 140, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A mounted on the sound / lamp control board 80A controls the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps and the sound output of the speaker 27, and the display control board 80B. The display control microcomputer 100 </ b> B is configured to control the display state of the variable display device 9. Then, a control command (hereinafter, sound / lamp control command) from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 is first transmitted to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A of the sound / lamp control board 80A. The sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A transmits a control command (hereinafter referred to as a display control command) corresponding to the sound / lamp control command received to the display control microcomputer 100B of the display control board 80B. The sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A controls the lighting / extinction of various lamps and the sound output of the speaker 27 based on the sound / lamp control command from the game control microcomputer 560. The display control microcomputer 100B The display state of the variable display device 9 is controlled based on a display control command from the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A.

  FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing a sound / lamp control main process executed by the sound / lamp control microcomputer according to the third embodiment. When the power is turned on, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A starts executing the main process. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval of the effect control processing (step S711). Thereafter, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A shifts to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S712). When a timer interrupt occurs, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A clears the flag (step S713) and executes the following sound / lamp control process.

  In the sound / lamp control process, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A first analyzes the received effect control command (sound / lamp side command analysis process: step S714). Next, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A performs a sound / lamp control process (step S715). In the sound / lamp control process, the process corresponding to the current control state is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and various lamps are turned on / off, the sound output of the speaker 27 is controlled, and the like. Further, a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating various random numbers is executed (step S716). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S712.

  FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the sound / lamp side command analysis process (step S714) in the sound / lamp control main process. The sound / lamp control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is stored in the command reception buffer. In the sound / lamp side command analysis processing, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S721). If a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the reception command is read from the command reception buffer (step S722).

  If the received sound / lamp control command is a control command for specifying a variation pattern (variation pattern command: 8000 (H) to 806A (H)) (step S723), the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A The command EXT data is stored in the fluctuation pattern data storage area in the RAM (step S724), and the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set (step S725). Then, control for transmitting a display control command corresponding to the variation pattern to the display control microcomputer 100B is executed (step S726).

  If the received sound / lamp control command is a control command (design information designation command: 8C00 (H) to 8C06 (H)) designating design information (step S727), the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A Control for transmitting a display control command corresponding to the symbol information to the display control microcomputer 100B is executed (step S728). If the received sound / lamp control command is another control command, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A performs control to transmit a display control command corresponding to the other command to the display control microcomputer 100B. Execute (step S729).

  When the display control microcomputer 100B receives the display control command from the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A, the same processing as the processing of the effect control means described in each of the above embodiments based on the received command. Execute. That is, the processing in the case where “production control” in FIGS. 40 to 121 is replaced with “display control” is executed.

  In the first embodiment, an effect control board 80, an audio output board 70, and a lamp driver board 35 are provided as boards on which a circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. In the sixth embodiment, a sound / lamp control board is provided. Although 80A and the display control board 80B are provided, a circuit for controlling the effect device may be mounted on one board. Furthermore, when the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted on two substrates, the way of dividing the circuit for controlling the effect device mounted on each substrate is arbitrary. For example, a first effect control board (display / lamp control board) on which a variable display device 9 and a circuit for controlling a lamp and the like are mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (such as the speaker 27) are mounted. Two boards, such as two production control boards, may be provided. In the sixth embodiment, the sound / lamp control board 80A transmits a display control command corresponding to the sound / lamp control command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the display control board 80B. May be the same data as the sound / lamp control command, or may be changed to a simplified command and transmitted as a display control command. In addition, when two boards, the first effect control board and the second effect control board, are provided, a command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 560 is transmitted to the second effect control board, A command is transmitted as it is from the second effect control board to the first effect control board, or is transmitted after processing (for example, changing the command form or contents, simplifying, or selecting only necessary commands). You may comprise.

  The big hit symbol and the small hit symbol displayed on the special symbol display 8 may be a common symbol (for example, “7”). In this way, the player will not be aware of the big hit or the small hit, the big hit type, or the like by the symbols displayed on the special symbol display 8. Therefore, the expectation for the transition to the probability variation state in the re-lottery effect is not impaired. In addition, the expectation of whether suddenly a big hit or a small hit will not be lost.

  In addition, as a special symbol stop symbol displayed on the special symbol display 8, the symbol for 15 rounds (probable big hit, non-probable big hit) may be a common big hit symbol. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether the probability change big hit or the non-probability big hit is based on the symbol displayed on the special symbol display 8. In addition, as a special symbol stop symbol displayed on the special symbol indicator 8, the symbol at the time of two rounds (suddenly probable big hit, small hit) may be a common symbol. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether the probability sudden hit or the big hit is suddenly determined by the symbols displayed on the special symbol display 8.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the variation pattern command is a dedicated variation pattern command (a variation pattern command that is not a regular big hit / probable variation big hit combined variation pattern command), the decoration pattern is decorated based on the dedicated variation pattern command. It was comprised so that the stop symbol of a symbol might be determined. However, it is configured to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol by determining the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the symbol information specifying command at the normal time and referring to the contents of the variation pattern command only when the symbol information specifying command is missed. May be.

  In addition, if any of the variation pattern command dedicated to probability variation jackpot, the variation pattern command dedicated to normal jackpot, or the variation pattern command dedicated to outliers is received, the symbol information designation command cannot be received. The stop design of the decorative design may be determined based on the content of the pattern command.

  In each of the above embodiments, the variation pattern command and the symbol information designation command are separated, but a single command may be used. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 may transmit one command indicating the variation pattern and the symbol information (displacement, normal big hit, or probable big hit) to the effect control microcomputer 100 at the start of symbol variation. Good. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the variation of the symbol based on the common command, specifies the variation pattern (including the variation time), and further determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

  In each of the above embodiments, the presence / absence of a re-lottery effect during symbol variation is specified by the variation pattern command (a variation pattern with a re-lottery effect during symbol variation is distinguished from a variation pattern without a re-lottery effect). At the same time, the symbol information designation command specified the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game and the execution timing of the re-lottery effect (promotion effect), but the design information designation command is not limited to this configuration. Without specifying whether or not a re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game, with the presence or absence of the re-lottery effect during the symbol variation with the change pattern command, whether or not the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game and the re-lottery effect (promotion effect) The execution timing may be designated.

  In addition, in the variation pattern command, the disparity, the normal big hit, the probability variation big hit are specified (the variation pattern is distinguished for each outlier, the normal big hit, the probability variation big hit), and the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect during the symbol variation is designated, and the symbol information is designated. In the command, a stop symbol, a non-probable variation symbol, a probability variation symbol, a sudden probability variation symbol, or a small hit symbol may be designated as a stop symbol at the time of a variable stop. When the probability variation big hit (execution of re-lottery effect during big hit) or probability variation big hit (execution of re-lottery effect during ending) is determined in step S62, the probability variable big hit is determined internally, Since the stop symbol is a non-probable variable symbol, a symbol information specifying command for specifying the non-probable variable symbol is transmitted. In the case of such a command designation method, the production control microcomputer 100 recognizes whether it is a big hit or a big hit type (ordinary big hit or a probable big hit) based on the variation pattern command, and Based on the information designation command, it is recognized whether the stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop should be an off symbol, a non-probable variable symbol, a probabilistic variable symbol, a sudden probability variable symbol, or a small hit symbol symbol. In the case of a big hit (excluding a sudden probability change big hit), the production control microcomputer 100 recognizes the presence / absence of a re-lottery effect after the big hit game starts based on the variation pattern command and the symbol information designation command. For example, if the symbol information designation command recognizes that the stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop is an uncertain variable symbol, and if the variable pattern command recognizes a probable bonus symbol, it must be promoted to a probable bonus symbol with a re-lottery effect after the jackpot game starts. Judge that there is.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when a re-lottery effect is executed after the big hit game is started (during the big hit or during the ending), the fluctuation pattern command is a variation pattern command for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit or a normal big hit only. A variation pattern command was transmitted (see Y, S206, and S207 in steps S204B), and a two-specific command per probability variation or a three-specific command per probability variation was transmitted as a symbol information designation command (see step S62). However, when the re-lottery effect is executed after the big hit game is started, a variation pattern command dedicated to the probability variation big hit is transmitted as the variation pattern command, and a probability variation big hit 2 designation command or a probability variation big hit 3 designation command is transmitted as the symbol information designation command. You may do it. That is, even when the re-lottery effect is executed after the start of the big hit game, the fluctuation pattern command dedicated to the probability change big hit may be transmitted. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 does not immediately determine the probability variation symbol based on the reception of the variation pattern command dedicated to probability variation jackpot, but the symbol information designation command received thereafter is a probability variation jackpot one designation command. When the symbol information designating command is a 2 specification command per probability variation or a 3 designation command per probability variation large, the non-probability symbol is determined and the non-probability variation symbol is derived and displayed when the fluctuation is stopped. And the control which promotes a non-probable variation symbol to a probable variation symbol in the re-lottery effect performed during a big hit or during an ending is performed.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, as a transmission order of the effect control command, the symbol information designation command is transmitted after the variation pattern command is transmitted. However, the variation pattern is transmitted after the symbol information designation command is transmitted. It may be configured to send a command.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the re-draw lottery effect after the big hit game, after the symbols are re-variable, the probability variation symbols are derived and displayed. You may make it alert | report to a player that it was a probable big hit by displaying a character or displaying a character (it transfers to a probable change state). In this case, it is determined in step S625E, S692, S1111 that “probability change” is displayed instead of determining the probability change symbol.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the big hit symbol is a flat eye such as “1 · 1 · 1”, but may be a combination of symbols other than the blue eye. For example, a big hit may be made when the left, middle and right symbols on the active line are aligned with “Large, Win, Ri”. In that case, it becomes reach when a part of the big hit symbol is aligned as the left and right symbols on the effective line.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the number of fluctuations after the end of the normal jackpot is counted at the start of the fluctuation, and the time reduction flag is reset when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number. It is also possible to count the number of fluctuations after the completion and reset the time reduction flag when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the re-drawing effect during the change is executed, the change pattern command for both normal big hit / probable big hit is always transmitted. That is, all of the normal big hit / probable big hit variation patterns included a redrawing effect during variation. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the re-lottery effect during the fluctuation may be included in the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the probable big hit or the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the normal big hit. In addition, there may be a variation pattern that does not include the re-drawing effect during variation as the variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the fluctuation pattern command for designating the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit for 15 rounds is a fluctuation pattern command for both normal big hit / probable big hit, a fluctuation pattern command dedicated for certain big hit, and a fluctuation only for normal big hit. The pattern command is provided, but it is possible to use only the variation pattern command for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit and the variation pattern command dedicated to the probable variation big hit (there is no normal variation pattern command dedicated to big hit).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the chance eyes to be displayed with the variation pattern command, and causes the effect control microcomputer 100 to display the chance eyes. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the presentation control microcomputer 100 receives a specific fluctuation pattern command (for example, a fluctuation pattern command with a super reach D), for example. It is determined whether or not to display, and when it is determined to display the chance eye, a predetermined chance eye may be selected and displayed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the probability change non-notification effect (common to probability change state / normal game state is common) that does not notify the player whether or not the game state after the end of 15 rounds of jackpot has shifted to the probability change state (or the probability change short state). 15 rounds of productions, or productions common to short-time and short-time conditions; for example, productions that do not know whether or not they are in a certain state without changing the background, etc. You may make it perform after the fluctuation | variation after the end of jackpot is started. When such a probabilistic non-announcement effect is executed, regardless of the probable big hit or non-probable big hit, the big hit symbol is a non-probable variable symbol (or the probabilistic symbol and the non-probable variable symbol are common), and promoted when performing a re-lottery effect. Avoid directing.

  In each of the above embodiments, even if the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed at the end of symbol variation, the lottery effect (for example, the probability variation symbol is re-variable and then the probability variation symbol is stopped again after starting the big hit game) An effect to be displayed or an effect to display the characters “probability change” may be executed. In this case, prior to the re-lottery effect, the player is informed that the winning symbol will be a promising big hit, so the re-lottery effect is not a promotion effect.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the chance eye that is likely to appear may be changed depending on the position of a predetermined image in the background. For example, the chance chance that the star is likely to appear is changed depending on whether the nearby star (earth) is at the lower position or the upper position. In this case, for example, a plurality of tables for selecting chance eyes are prepared in advance, and the distribution of the determination values for each chance eye is made different. And it is realizable by switching the table which selects a chance eye according to the position of a near star.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the symbol difference of the middle symbol with respect to the reach symbol may be easily shifted by one frame depending on the position of a predetermined image in the background. For example, when a nearby star (Earth) is at a lower position, the frame is likely to be shifted by one frame, and when it is at an upper position, the frame is not easily shifted by one frame. In this case, for example, a plurality of tables for determining the symbol difference for the reach symbol are prepared in advance, and the distribution of the determination value for each symbol difference is varied. And it is realizable by switching the table which determines a symbol difference according to the position of a near star.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, a notice effect may be prohibited depending on the position of a predetermined image in the background. For example, a notice effect using a specific character is executed only when Saturn is at a lower position. In this case, for example, as a table for determining the mode of the notice effect, a plurality of tables in which a determination value is assigned to the form of the notice effect using a specific character and a table that is not assigned are prepared in advance. Keep it. And it is realizable by switching the table which determines the aspect of a notice effect according to the position of Saturn.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the chance eye that is likely to appear may be changed depending on the speed of the background image variation display (scrolling). For example, the chance eyes that are likely to appear are changed depending on whether a nearby star (Earth) fluctuates at high speed or fluctuates at a relatively low speed. In this case, for example, a plurality of tables for selecting chance eyes are prepared in advance, and the distribution of the determination values for each chance eye is made different. And it is realizable by switching the table which selects a chance eye according to the fluctuation speed of a near star.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol difference of the middle symbol with respect to the reach symbol may be easily shifted by one frame depending on the speed of the display variation of the background image. For example, when a nearby star (Earth) fluctuates at high speed, it is likely to shift by one frame, and when it fluctuates at a relatively low speed, it is difficult to shift by one frame. In this case, for example, a plurality of tables for determining the symbol difference for the reach symbol are prepared in advance, and the distribution of the determination value for each symbol difference is varied. And it is realizable by switching the table which determines a symbol difference according to the fluctuation speed of a near star.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, a notice effect may be prohibited depending on the speed of the background image change display. For example, a notice effect using a specific character is executed only when Saturn fluctuates at a relatively high speed. In this case, for example, as a table for determining the mode of the notice effect, a plurality of tables in which a determination value is assigned to the form of the notice effect using a specific character and a table that is not assigned are prepared in advance. Keep it. And it is realizable by switching the table which determines the aspect of notice effect according to the change speed of Saturn.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine of the above embodiment can be given a predetermined game value to a player mainly when the stop symbol of the special symbol that is variably displayed on the variable display unit based on the start winning prize becomes a predetermined symbol. A pachinko machine that can be given a predetermined gaming value to a player when there is a prize in a predetermined area of an electric game that is released based on a start prize, or a start prize The present invention can be applied even to a pachinko gaming machine in which a predetermined right is generated or continues when a winning is given to a predetermined electric combination that is released when a stop symbol of a variably displayed symbol becomes a predetermined symbol combination. . Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine that inserts game medals and sets a bet number and plays a game, or a game machine that inserts game balls instead of game medals and sets a bet number and plays a game.

  The present invention can be applied to a game such as a pachinko game machine, and can be applied to a game of a gaming machine in which the game state can be controlled to a special game state such as a probability change state.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement pattern of a reach design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement pattern of a jackpot symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the chance eyes A on production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the chance eyes B on production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the chance eyes (sudden probability variation pattern) for sudden probability variation big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the chance eyes for small hits (small hit symbol). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board | substrate, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a portion related to image display control in the effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution rate of the determination value in a jackpot determination table, and the distribution rate of the determination value in a jackpot classification determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big prize opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process after a special winning opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process after a special winning opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit release pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during small hit release. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration symbol command control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command set process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command transmission process. It is a timing diagram showing the transmission timing of the effect control command when the 15-round jackpot game is executed. It is a timing diagram showing the transmission timing of the effect control command when a two-round big hit game and a small hit game are executed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process which the microcomputer for production control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the memory area setting command process which the microcomputer for production control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the advance transfer command process which the microcomputer for production control performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st decoration design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of reach non-losing determination processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for left symbol selection. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for right symbol selection. It is explanatory drawing which shows a chance eye prohibition pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a chance eye prohibition pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for middle symbol selection. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for middle symbol selection. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for middle symbol selection. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for chance prohibitions. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a reach determination loss determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for common reach symbol selection. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reach design table for singles. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reach design selection table for doubles. It is explanatory drawing which shows a symbol selection table during normal deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a super development time symbol selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for chance eyes A selection. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for chance eyes B selection. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st probability variation design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st probability variation design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st non-probable variable symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sudden probability variation design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol selection table for accuracies. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd decoration design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd non-probability variable symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd non-probability variable symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd probability variation design determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the common jackpot symbol selection table (a normal jackpot, a probability variation jackpot (promotion during jackpot promotion), a probability variation jackpot (ending promotion)). It is explanatory drawing which shows the common jackpot symbol selection table (probability straight hit). It is explanatory drawing which shows the common jackpot symbol selection table (re-lottery promotion). It is explanatory drawing which shows the common jackpot symbol selection table (relief). It is explanatory drawing which shows the normal symbol temporary stop selection table (relief) for normal. It is explanatory drawing which shows a super development time symbol selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the single big hit symbol selection table (normal big hit, probability variation big hit (promotion during big hit), probability variation big hit (ending promotion)). It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit symbol selection table for singles (probability straight hit). It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot symbol selection table for singles (re-lottery promotion). It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for single jackpot symbol selection (relief). It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for big hit symbol selection for a double tip (normal hit, probable big hit (promotion during big hit), probable big hit (ending promotion)). It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for big hits symbol selection for double tip hits (probability straight hit). It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for big hit symbol selection for double hits (re-lottery promotion). It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for big hits symbol selection for double point hits (relief). It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for big hits symbol selection for double after hits (normal hit, probable big hit (promotion during big hit), probable big hit (ending promotion)). It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit symbol selection table (probability straight hit) for double after hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for double hits jackpot symbol selection (re-lottery promotion). It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for big hit symbol selection for double after (relief). It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for chance eyes A selection. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for chance eyes B selection. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol selection table for small hits. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a temporary determination symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 3rd probability variation design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the register incorporated in VDP. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the address map in VRAM. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the method of expansion | deployment in the case of expand | deploying a component image from the display area of VRAM to a display area. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the usage method of VRAM. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the background image divided | segmented into the several layer. It is explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the image displayed on several layers in a variable display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice selection process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a notice selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect of a notice production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of various update object command processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode during the change of a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the scroll of the image of a near star. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a post-round process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a post-round process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit end effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the re-lottery effect of the jackpot symbol performed in a variable display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a transfer control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a storage area setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pre-transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an automatic transfer control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a drawing process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fixed address designation display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an automatic transfer display process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a symbol information designation command reception waiting process in the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol arrangement of decorative symbols in Embodiment 3. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern in Embodiment 3. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the loss reach pattern in Embodiment 3. FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of reach determination loss determination processing according to the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reach symbol selection table at the time of the low probability in Embodiment 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reach symbol selection table at the time of high probability in Embodiment 3. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of reachless losing determination processing according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing a right symbol selection table in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a medium symbol selection table in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display example of pseudo continuous notice in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 16 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of a relay board, a sound / lamp control board, and a display control board in a sixth embodiment. 18 is a flowchart illustrating a main sound / lamp control process executed by the sound / lamp control microcomputer according to the sixth embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing sound / lamp side command analysis processing in the sixth embodiment.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Special symbol display 9 Variable display device 14 Start winning opening 15 Variable winning ball device 31 Main board 80 Production control board 80A Sound / lamp control board 80B Display control board 100 Production control microcomputer 100A Sound / lamp control Microcomputer 100B Microcomputer for display control 560 Microcomputer for game control

Claims (1)

A plurality of types of identification information that can be identified can be variably displayed in a predetermined direction in a predetermined arrangement, and a variable display device having a display unit for displaying a background image is provided, and a combination of identification information is derived and displayed in the variable display device A plurality of possible lines are set in advance, and when a specific display result of a combination of specific identification information out of a combination of identification information as a display result of variable display is derived and displayed on the line , a transition is made to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player is, a game machine to perform a special effect in the variable display device when the combination of the special identification information of the combination of identification information derived displayed as a temporary lead or show the results on the line,
Plural types of identification information are each given different specific information to specify the order in the array,
The variable display pattern of the variable display of identification information derives and displays reach identification information that constitutes a part of the identification information that constitutes the combination of the specific identification information, and identification other than the final identification information that is finally derived and displayed. Including a variable display pattern in which a combination of information is derived and displayed, but the final identification information is in a variable state of reach display,
The combination of special identification information is a combination of identification information not including reach identification information,
A game control microcomputer for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect control microcomputer for controlling the display state of the variable display device,
The game control microcomputer is:
Whether to be the specific display result, whether to be a combination of the special identification information, a variable display pattern of variable display of the identification information, a pre-determining means for determining before the derivation display of the display result,
A pre-determined command transmitting means for transmitting a pre-determined command capable of specifying the determination result of the pre-determining means,
The production control microcomputer is:
Identification information determining means for determining, from a plurality of types, a combination of identification information that is provisionally derived and displayed on the display unit in the variable display device or a combination of identification information that is derived and displayed as a display result based on the prior determination command; ,
Based on the reception of the pre-determining command, the display unit starts variable display of identification information in a predetermined direction, and when the variable display time that can be specified from the variable display pattern has elapsed, the identification information determination means Variable display control means for deriving and displaying a combination of identification information determined by
In the variable display device, including background display control means for variably displaying the background image in a direction opposite to the direction of variable display of the identification information,
The identification information determining means includes
When it is specified that the combination of the special identification information is based on the pre-determined command, the combination of the identification information is determined as the combination of the special identification information ,
When it is specified that the reach state is reached and the specific display result is not set based on the pre-determined command, the reach identification information is determined, and the specific information attached to the final identification information and the reach identification information are attached. A difference with the specified information is selected using the first difference selection table , and final identification information is determined based on the selected difference.
Based on the predetermination command, when specifying that no combination of not the reach state and the specific display results and the special identification information is a combination of a combination of identification information the special identification information And determining a combination of identification information using a reach non-reach table set so as not to be a combination of identification information including the reach identification information ,
In the variable display pattern, the reach identification information is derived and displayed on a predetermined line and then temporary final identification information that does not constitute the specific display result is provisionally derived and displayed, and then the specific display result is displayed by executing a specific effect. Including a variable display pattern for deriving and displaying the final identification information to be configured,
The identification information determining means includes
When the variable display pattern for executing the specific effect is specified based on the pre-determined command, the difference between the specific information attached to the temporary final identification information and the specific information attached to the reach identification information is set to the second Select using the difference selection table, determine the provisional final identification information by the selected difference,
When selecting the difference between the specific information attached to the provisional final identification information and the specific information attached to the reach identification information, the specific information and the reach identification information attached to the final identification information when the specific effect is not executed. Control data so that the difference between the specific information attached to the provisional final identification information and the specific information attached to the reach identification information is reduced at a higher rate than when selecting the difference from the specific information attached to the reach identification information. A difference is selected using the second difference selection table to which is assigned .